Service Manual
AWG710
4 GS/s Arbitrary Waveform Generator
070-A830-51
This document applies to firmware version 3.0
and above.
Warning
The servicing instructions are for use by qualified
personnel only. To avoid personal injury, do not
perform any servicing unless you are qualified to
do so. Refer to all safety summaries prior to
performing service.
www.tektronix.com
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARRANTY
Tektronix warrants that the products that it manufactures and sells will be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. If a product proves defective during this warranty period, Tektronix,
at its option, either will repair the defective product without charge for parts and labor, or will provide a replacement in
exchange for the defective product.
In order to obtain service under this warranty, Customer must notify Tektronix of the defect before the expiration of the
warranty period and make suitable arrangements for the performance of service. Customer shall be responsible for
packaging and shipping the defective product to the service center designated by Tektronix, with shipping charges prepaid.
Tektronix shall pay for the return of the product to Customer if the shipment is to a location within the country in which the
Tektronix service center is located. Customer shall be responsible for paying all shipping charges, duties, taxes, and any
other charges for products returned to any other locations.
This warranty shall not apply to any defect, failure or damage caused by improper use or improper or inadequate
maintenance and care. Tektronix shall not be obligated to furnish service under this warranty a) to repair damage resulting
from attempts by personnel other than Tektronix representatives to install, repair or service the product; b) to repair
damage resulting from improper use or connection to incompatible equipment; c) to repair any damage or malfunction
caused by the use of non-Tektronix supplies; or d) to service a product that has been modified or integrated with other
products when the effect of such modification or integration increases the time or difficulty of servicing the product.
THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN BY TEKTRONIX IN LIEU OF ANY OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TEKTRONIX’ RESPONSIBILITY TO
REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS IS THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY PROVIDED TO
THE CUSTOMER FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. TEKTRONIX AND ITS VENDORS WILL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IRRESPECTIVE
OF WHETHER TEKTRONIX OR THE VENDOR HAS ADVANCE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
General Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Safety Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Other Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting Tektronix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xi
xiii
xv
xv
xvi
xvi
xvii
xix
Specifications
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Certification and Compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–1
1–3
1–4
1–16
Operating Information
Preparation for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplying Operating Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Repackaging for Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Applying and Interrupting Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controls and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shortcut Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Double Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–1
2–1
2–3
2–4
2–10
2–11
2–13
2–13
2–18
2–27
2–28
2–36
2–38
2–40
Theory of Operation
Signal Edit Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–7
Performance Verification
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–2
4–3
4–7
4–13
4–16
4–22
Self Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AWG710 Test Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Tests (Normal Out), (except option 02) . . . . . .
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time Tests (Direct DA Out),
(except option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Response Tests (Normal Out), (except option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–27
4–35
i
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Trigger Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Input and Enhanced Mode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1/4 Clock Frequency and 10 MHz Reference Input Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Marker Output Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–37
4–41
4–48
4–50
Adjustment Procedures
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Check/Adjustment Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustment Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magic Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–1
5–1
5–3
5–3
5–5
5–6
5–10
Maintenance
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection and Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal and Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation — Preparation for Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for External Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for Internal Modules(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures for Internal Modules(2), . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages and Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Execution Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Specific Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Query Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-On Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Request Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Request Control Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation Complete Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–1
6–1
6–2
6–4
6–9
6–9
6–16
6–17
6–30
6–44
6–51
6–51
6–59
6–60
6–62
6–64
6–65
6–65
6–65
6–66
6–66
6–67
Options and Accessories
Power Cord Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7–1
7–2
7–3
Replaceable Electrical Parts
Diagrams
ii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Parts Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Replaceable Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10–1
10–2
iii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1–1: Signal timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 1–2: Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–10
1–15
Figure 2–1: Rear panel power switch, fuse holder,
and power connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–7
2–8
Figure 2–2: Location of the ON/STBY switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–3: Front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–4: Front panel keypad area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–5: Front panel keypad area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–6: Rear panel signal and power connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–14
2–15
2–16
2–17
Figure 2–7: Menu buttons, bezel menu buttons, and the CLEAR MENU
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–18
2–19
2–20
2–21
2–21
2–22
2–23
2–25
2–26
2–27
2–33
2–33
2–36
2–38
Figure 2–8: Bottom and side menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–9: Pop-up menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–10: Dialog box example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–11: Screen menu example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–12: Knob icon displayed in Status Display area . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–13: Keypad buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–14: Three type of Input text dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–15: Input Filename dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–16: Shortcut controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–17: Files and directories with read only attribute . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–18: Input Filename dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–19: Double Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–20: Overwrite confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–21: File list window examples in which
Quick View is available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–39
2–39
2–40
2–42
2–43
Figure 2–22: Viewing a file by Quick View function . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–23: Main Setup screen (small figure: option 02) . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–24: Setup Waveform/Sequence menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2–25: Viewing a file in the Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–1: AWG710 interconnect diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–2: AWG710 block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3–3: Relationship between memory address control
and waveform memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–2
3–3
3–6
iv
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 4–1: Diagnostic menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–4
4–6
Figure 4–2: Calibration result message box (except option 02) . . . . .
Figure 4–3: EVENT IN connector pins and signals
and ground closure connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–9
4–10
4–16
4–18
Figure 4–4: Loading file; selecting storage drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–5: Cont mode initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–6: Triggered mode initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–7: Relationship between trigger signal
and waveform output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–19
4–21
4–23
Figure 4–8: Relationship between gate signal and waveform output .
Figure 4–9: Amplitude accuracy initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–10: Direct DA output amplitude accuracy
initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–27
4–29
Figure 4–11: Direct DA output pulse rise time initial test hookup . . .
Figure 4–12: Option 02 output amplitude accuracy
initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–31
4–33
4–35
4–37
4–39
4–39
4–40
4–40
4–41
Figure 4–13: Optipn 02 output pulse rise time initial test hookup . . .
Figure 4–14: Pulse response initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–15: Trigger input initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–16: Trigger signal and waveform output (+5 V check 1) . . .
Figure 4–17: Trigger signal and waveform output (+5 V check 2) . . .
Figure 4–18: Trigger signal and waveform output (–5 V check 1) . . .
Figure 4–19: Trigger signal and waveform output (–5 V check 2) . . .
Figure 4–20: Event input and enhanced mode initial test hookup . . .
Figure 4–21: Waveform while all ground disclosure
switches are open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–42
4–43
4–43
4–44
4–45
4–46
4–46
Figure 4–22: Waveform output when the SW1 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–23: Waveform output when SW2 is closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–24: Waveform output when the SW3 is closed . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–25: Waveform output when SW4 is closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–26: Initial waveform output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–27: DC waveform output when the SW5 is closed . . . . . . . .
Figure 4–28: 1/4 Clock frequency and 10 MHz reference
input initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–48
4–50
Figure 4–29: Marker output initial test hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–1: Accessing the service switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–2: Hookup for the reference clock frequency adjustment . .
Figure 5–3: Hookup for the Marker level adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5–4: Hookup for the Marker level adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–4
5–6
5–7
5–10
v
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 6–1: Instrument orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–2: External modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–3: Internal modules (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–4: Internal modules(1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–5: Internal modules(2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–6: Knob removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–7: Line fuse and line cord removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–8: Cabinet removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–9: Trim ring and menu buttons removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–10: A20 Front Panel assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–11: Disassembly of Front Panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–12: Output assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–13: Cabinet modules removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–14: Fan removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–15: Floppy Disk Drive removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–16: Display assembly removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–17: Power supply module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–18: A10 Connector board removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–19: CPU Unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–20: CPU, A40 PCI Interface, and GPIB boards removal . .
Figure 6–21: Hard disk and Flash disk removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–22: Rear Chassis removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–11
6–12
6–13
6–14
6–15
6–18
6–19
6–22
6–23
6–25
6–26
6–27
6–29
6–31
6–32
6–33
6–35
6–37
6–39
6–40
6–41
6–43
Figure 6–23: Removal of the A77, A71 and A50 boards
(except option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–45
Figure 6–24: Removal of the A77, A72 and A50 boards
(for option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–48
6–52
6–53
6–54
Figure 6–25: Primary troubleshooting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–26: Troubleshooting procedure 1 — Power Supply module
Figure 6–27: Power Supply connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–28: Troubleshooting procedure 2 — CPU
or Front Panel module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–55
6–56
6–57
6–58
Figure 6–29: Troubleshooting procedure 3 — LCD module . . . . . . .
Figure 6–30: A10 Connector board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6–31: Troubleshooting procedure 4 — Module isolation . . . . .
Figure 9–1: Block and interconnect diagram for the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9–2
Figure 10–1: Front and Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10–2: Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10–5
10–7
vi
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Figure 10–3: Front Output unit (except option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10–9
Figure 10–4: Front Output unit (for option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11
Figure 10–5: Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–13
Figure 10–6: CPU unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–15
Figure 10–7: Circuit boards(except option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–17
Figure 10–8: Circuit boards (for option 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–19
Figure 10–9: Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–21
Figure 10–10: Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–23
Figure 10–11: Rack mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–25
vii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1–1: AWG710 waveform editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–2: Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–3: Arbitrary waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–4: Clock generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–5: Internal trigger generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–6: Main output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–7: Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–8: Auxiliary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–9: Period jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–10: Cycle to cycle jitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–11: Auxiliary inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–12: Event Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–13: 10 MHz reference clock input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–14: Function generator (FG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–15: Display and timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–16: AC line power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–17: Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–18: Interface connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–19: Installation requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–20: Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–21: Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–22: Certifications and compliances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 1–23: Installation category and pollution degree descriptions
1–1
1–4
1–4
1–5
1–5
1–5
1–7
1–7
1–8
1–8
1–9
1–11
1–11
1–12
1–13
1–13
1–13
1–13
1–14
1–14
1–15
1–16
1–17
Table 2–1: Power-cord conductor identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–2: Power cord identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–3: Fuse part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–4: Fuse cap part numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–5: Side menu elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–6: Text input button functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–7: Shortcut controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–8: AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator file types . . . .
Table 2–9: Drive and directory menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–10: Waveform record length adjustment messages . . . . . . .
Table 2–11: File operation in double windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–2
2–2
2–5
2–5
2–20
2–26
2–27
2–28
2–29
2–34
2–37
viii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table 2–12: Confirmation selection for copy-all
and move-all operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–13: Setup screen parameter icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–14: Setup bottom menu buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2–15: Setup output parameter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–38
2–41
2–41
2–44
Table 3–1: Run modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 3–2: Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–4
3–8
Table 4–1: Performance test items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–2: Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 4–3: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk . .
4–7
4–8
4–11
Table 5–1: Adjustments required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–2: Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–3: Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5–4: File list for performance Check/adjustment disk . . . . . . .
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–5
Table 6–1: Relative susceptibility to static-discharge damage . . . . . .
Table 6–2: External Inspection Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–3: Internal inspection check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–4: Tools required for module removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–5: Definition of event codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–6: Command errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–7: Execution errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–8: Device specific errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–9: Query errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–10: Power-on events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–11: User request events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–12: Request control events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–13: Operation complete events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6–14: Messages and codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–3
6–5
6–6
6–10
6–59
6–60
6–62
6–64
6–65
6–65
6–65
6–66
6–66
6–67
Table 7–1: Power cord options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7–2: Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7–3: Optional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7–1
7–3
7–3
ix
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
x
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Review the following safety precautions to avoid injury and prevent damage to
this product or any products connected to it. To avoid potential hazards, use this
product only as specified.
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures.
To Avoid Fire or
Personal Injury
Use Proper Power Cord. Use only the power cord specified for this product and
certified for the country of use.
Connect and Disconnect Properly. Do not connect or disconnect probes or test
leads while they are connected to a voltage source.
Ground the Product. This product is grounded through the grounding conductor
of the power cord. To avoid electric shock, the grounding conductor must be
connected to earth ground. Before making connections to the input or output
terminals of the product, ensure that the product is properly grounded.
Observe All Terminal Ratings. To avoid fire or shock hazard, observe all ratings
and markings on the product. Consult the product manual for further ratings
information before making connections to the product.
The common terminal is at ground potential. Do not connect the common
terminal to elevated voltages.
Do not apply a potential to any terminal, including the common terminal, that
exceeds the maximum rating of that terminal.
Do Not Operate Without Covers. Do not operate this product with covers or panels
removed.
Use Proper Fuse. Use only the fuse type and rating specified for this product.
Avoid Exposed Circuitry. Do not touch exposed connections and components
when power is present.
Do Not Operate With Suspected Failures. If you suspect there is damage to this
product, have it inspected by qualified service personnel.
Do Not Operate in Wet/Damp Conditions.
Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere.
Keep Product Surfaces Clean and Dry.
Provide Proper Ventilation. Refer to the manual’s installation instructions for
details on installing the product so it has proper ventilation.
xi
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
General Safety Summary
Symbols and Terms
Terms in this Manual. These terms may appear in this manual:
WARNING. Warning statements identify conditions or practices that could result
in injury or loss of life.
CAUTION. Caution statements identify conditions or practices that could result in
damage to this product or other property.
Terms on the Product. These terms may appear on the product:
DANGER indicates an injury hazard immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
WARNING indicates an injury hazard not immediately accessible as you read the
marking.
CAUTION indicates a hazard to property including the product.
Symbols on the Product. The following symbols may appear on the product:
WARNING
High Voltage
Protective Ground
(Earth) Terminal
CAUTION
Refer to Manual
xii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Safety Summary
Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures. Read this Service
Safety Summary and the General Safety Summary before performing any service
procedures.
Do Not Service Alone. Do not perform internal service or adjustments of this
product unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is
present.
Disconnect Power. To avoid electric shock, disconnect the mains power by means
of the power cord or, if provided, the power switch.
Use Care When Servicing With Power On. Dangerous voltages or currents may
exist in this product. Disconnect power, remove battery (if applicable), and
disconnect test leads before removing protective panels, soldering, or replacing
components.
To avoid electric shock, do not touch exposed connections.
Calendar (date and time) Backup Battery. This product contains a Lithium:poly-
carbon monofluoride battery for calendar backup purposes. This battery is part of
the CPU unit and is not replaceable.
xiii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Safety Summary
xiv
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator service manual provides informa-
tion necessary for servicing the waveform generator to the module level.
Manual Structure
This manual is divided into main sections that address topics such as Specifica-
tions and Theory of Operation. Further, some sections are divided into subsec-
tions, such as Product Description and Removal and Installation Procedures.
Sections containing procedures also contain introductions to those procedures.
Be sure to read these introductions as they provide information needed to
perform the service correctly and efficiently. The following list provides a brief
description of each manual section.
H
H
H
H
H
H
Specifications describes the waveform generator and the characteristics that
apply to it.
Operating Information includes general information and operating
instructions.
Theory of Operation explains circuit descriptions that support service to the
module level.
Performance Verification provides procedures for confirming that the
waveform generator functions properly and meets warranted limits.
Adjustment Procedures provides information and procedures to perform
waveform generator adjustments.
Maintenance contains information and procedures for performing preventive
and corrective maintenance on the waveform generator. These instructions
include cleaning, module removal and installation, and fault isolation to the
module.
H
H
Options contains information on servicing factory-installed options.
Electrical Parts List section refers you to the Mechanical Parts List section
which contains both the electrical and mechanical information on all module
parts.
H
H
Diagrams contains illustrations of modules and functional blocks in the
waveform generator.
Mechanical Parts List provides a listing of all replaceable modules, their
descriptions, and their Tektronix part numbers.
xv
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Manual Conventions
Throughout this manual you will notice the use of certain conventions. Some
sections of the manual contain procedures for you to perform. To keep those
instructions clear and consistent, this manual uses the following conventions:
H
Names of front panel controls and menus appear in the same case (such as
initial capitals or all uppercase) in the manual as is used on the waveform
generator front panel and menus. Front panel names are all uppercase letters;
for example, SETUP, UTILITY, HARDCOPY.
H
Instruction steps are numbered unless there is only one step.
Modules
Throughout this manual, any replaceable component, assembly, or part of the
waveform generator is referred to generically as a module. A module is an
assembly (such as a circuit board), as opposed to a component (such as a resistor
or integrated circuit). Sometimes a single component is a module; for example,
the chassis of the waveform generator.
Safety
Symbols and terms related to safety appear in the Safety Summary at the front of
this manual.
Finding Other Information
Other documentation for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator includes:
H
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator user manual contains a tutorial
that describes how to operate the waveform generator. It also includes a
detailed explanation of how to best use the waveform generator features.
H
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Programmer manual explains
how to use a GPIB interface to control the waveform generator remotely.
xvi
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Contacting Tektronix
Phone
1-800-833-9200*
Address
Tektronix, Inc.
Department or name (if known)
14200 SW Karl Braun Drive
P.O. Box 500
Beaverton, OR 97077
USA
Web site
www.tektronix.com
Sales support
Service support
Technical support
1-800-833-9200, select option 1*
1-800-833-9200, select option 2*
Email: [email protected]
1-800-833-9200, select option 3*
6:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. Pacific time
*
This phone number is toll free in North America. After office hours, please leave a
voice mail message.
Outside North America, contact a Tektronix sales office or distributor; see the
Tektronix web site for a list of offices.
xvii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
xviii
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This manual provides information and procedures necessary for properly
servicing the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator, as well as general
information critical to safe and effective servicing.
To prevent personal injury or damage to the waveform generator, review the
following information before attempting service:
H
H
H
The procedures in this manual should be performed only by qualified service
personnel.
Read the General Safety Summary and Service Safety Summary beginning on
page xi.
Read Preparation for Use in the Operating Information subsection.
When using this manual for servicing, be sure to follow all warnings, cautions,
and notes.
Performance Verification Procedures
Complete the performance check described in the Performance Verification
section every 12 months. In addition, a performance check is recommended after
module replacement.
If the waveform generator does not meet performance criteria, repair is
necessary.
Strategy for Servicing
Throughout this manual the term, module, refers to any field-replaceable
component, assembly, or part of the waveform generator.
This manual contains all the information needed for periodic maintenance of the
waveform generator. Further, it contains all information for corrective mainte-
nance down to the module level. To isolate a module failure, follow the
troubleshooting procedures found in the Maintenance section. To remove and
replace any failed module, follow the instructions in the Removal and Installa-
tion Procedures subsection. After isolating a faulty module, replace it with a
fully tested module obtained from the factory. The Replaceable Mechanical
Parts subsection contains part number and ordering information for all replace-
able modules.
xix
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Tektronix Service Offerings
Tektronix provides service to cover repair under warranty as well as other
services that provide a cost-effective answer to your service needs.
Whether providing warranty repair service or any of the other services listed
below, Tektronix service technicians are well trained service professionals. They
have access to the latest information on improvements to the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator as well as new options.
WarrantyRepair Service
Tektronix warrants this product for one year from date of purchase. The warranty
appears at the front of this manual. Tektronix technicians provide warranty
service at most Tektronix service locations. The Tektronix product catalog lists
all worldwide service locations.
Self Service
Tektronix supports repair to the module level by providing Module Exchange.
Module Exchange. This service reduces downtime for repair by allowing you to
exchange most modules for remanufactured ones. Each module comes with a
90-day service warranty.
For More Information. Contact your local Tektronix service center or sales
engineer for more information on any of the repair or adjustment services just
described.
xx
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Overview
Product Description
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is a waveform generator that can
generate simple and arbitrary waveforms, one-channel differential output
arbitrary waveforms, and function generator waveforms.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator allows you to create sine, triangle,
square, ramp, and complex waves, as well as direct current and noise signals.
You can also set waveform attributes such as frequency, amplitude, and offset.
This instrument contains a hard disk drive, a 3.5-inch floppy disk drive, and
Ethernet interface for storing and recalling waveform data and instrument
settings.
You can control the instrument remotely by sending commands through both the
GPIB and 100/10BASE-T interfaces, as well as transfer waveform data directly
from a digital storage oscilloscope to the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator using the GPIB interface. This enables you to use the instrument in
combination with other measurement equipment and a computer.
Main Features
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator contains the following main
features:
H
H
H
H
H
4.0 GS/s sampling rate
8-bit DA converter
16 M-word waveform memory (32 M optional)
Two arbitrary marker outputs
Five waveform editors (see Table 1–1)
Table 1-1: AWG710 waveform editors
Editor
Description
Waveform
Pattern
Creates analog waveform data in graphic or tabular form.
Creates analog waveform data in timing and table form.
Sequence
Creates sequences of waveforms by combining the waveform files
created with the Waveform and/or Pattern Editors.
1-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Product Overview
Table 1-1: AWG710 waveform editors (Cont.)
Editor
Description
Text
Edits plain ASCII format waveform files. For example, you can use
the Text editor to edit ASCII format waveform files that are read
from an external device.
Equation
Creates files with equations and compiles them into waveform
files.
Additional Features
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator provides these additional features:
H
An Ethernet port for using the NFS (Network File System) and/or FTP link.
Refer to Ethernet Networking in the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator User manual for information.
H
A GPIB interface that can be used for remotely controlling the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator and for transferring the waveform data from
the external oscilloscopes.
Refer to Connecting to a GPIB Network in the AWG710 Arbitrary Wave-
form Generator user manual for information on setting the GPIB parameters.
Refer to the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Programmer manual
for information on the remote control commands.
Refer to the Reference:Capturing Waveforms subsection of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator user manual for transferring waveforms from
the external oscilloscopes to the waveform generator.
H
A port on the rear panel for connecting a 101- or 106- type keyboard to the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. You can input values or text using
the keyboard instead of the numeric keypad on the front panel. Refer to the
Reference:External Keyboards section of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator user manual.
H
H
An internal clock for setting up the current date and time. Refer to Internal
Clock (Date and Time) in the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator user
manual. This setup procedure is also described in Tutorial 1: Instrument
Setup.
An adjustment of focused color. Focused color allows you to display the
system utility screen and set the highlight color. Refer to the Focused Color
subsection for further information. This setup procedure is also described in
Tutorial 1: Instrument Setup in the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
User manual.
1-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
This section contains the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator specifications.
All specifications are guaranteed unless labeled Typical. Typical specifications
are provided for your convenience.
Specifications that are marked with the n symbol in the Characteristics column
are defined in the Performance erification section. The corresponding page of
the performance verification procedures can be found in the PV reference page
column.
Subcategories of the Characteristics column will appear in boldface font.
See Tables 1–2 through 1–21 for characteristics and descriptions of the electrical
specifications. For signal timing, see Figure 1–1 and for mechanical dimensions,
see Figure 1–2.
Performance Conditions
Performance limits in this specification are valid under these conditions:
H
H
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must be calibrated/adjusted at
an ambient temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must be in an environment
with temperature, altitude, humidity, and vibration within the operating
limits described in these specifications.
H
H
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must have a warm-up period of
at least 20 minutes.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must be operating at an
ambient temperature between +10_ C and +40_ C.
Warranted characteristics are described in terms of quantifiable performance
limits.
1-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Electrical Specification
Table 1-2: Operation modes
Characteristics
Description
Continuous
Waveform is continuously output in this mode. When a sequence is defined, waveforms
are sequentially or repeatedly output in the order defined by the sequence. The extended
sequence functions, such as trigger input and event jump, are inactive in this mode.
Triggered
Gated
Waveform is output only once when a trigger event is created. A trigger signal is created by
the external trigger input signal, GPIB trigger command, and/or pressing the front panel
FORCE TRIGGER button. The extended sequence functions such as trigger input and
event jump, are inactive in this mode.
The waveform is output in the same way as in the continuous mode only when the gate is
opened. The gate is opened by the gated signal.
Note that the output is made from the top of the first waveform for every gate period. The
clock signal continuously outputs from the connector outside the gate period.
Enhanced
The waveforms are sequentially or repeatedly output according to the procedures defined
in the sequence. All extended functions such as trigger input, event jump, and so on are
effective and waveforms are controlled for output by the functions in this mode.
Table 1-3: Arbitrary waveforms
Characteristics
Waveform memory
Op.01
Description
Memory length: 16 200 000 words (8 bits/1 word)
Memory length: 32 400 000 words (8 bits/1 word)
Memory length: 16 200 000 words (2 markers 1 bit/ 1 word)
Memory length: 32 400 000 words (2 markers 1 bit/ 1 word)
Maximum 8000 steps
Marker memory
Op.01
Sequence memory
Sequence counter
Waveform data points
Op.01
1 to 65 536 and Infinite
Multiple of 4 in the range from 960 to 16 200 000 points
Multiple of 4 in the range from 960 to 32 400 000 points
Data storage
Hard disk
10 G bytes
Floppy disk
1.44 M bytes
1-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-4: Clock generator
Characteristics
Sampling frequency
Resolution
Description
50 kHz to 4 GHz
8 digits
PV reference page
1
Internal clock
n Frequency accuracy
Page 4-48
"1 ppm (10_ C to 40_ C) (50_ F to 104_ F) , for one year after
calibration
Phase noise at 1/4 clock output,
Typical
(Data Clock is 1/4th of the output sample rate)
-80 dBc / Hz (1 GHz with 10 kHz offset)
-100 dBc/Hz (1 GHz with 100 kHz offset)
1
The internal reference oscillator is used.
Table 1-5: Internal trigger generator
Characteristics
Internal trigger rate
Accuracy
Description
PV reference page
2
"0.1%
Range
1.0 ms to 10.0 s
3 digits, minimum 0.1 ms
Resolution
2
The internal reference oscillator is used.
Table 1-6: Mainoutput
3
Characteristics
Output connector
Output signal
DA converter
Resolution
Description
PV reference page
Front panel SMA connectors
Complementary; CH1 and CH1
8 bits
Differential nonlinearity
Integral nonlinearity
Output impedance
Within "1/2 LSB
Within "1 LS B
50 W
Normal out (except option 02)
Output voltage
Amplitude
-1.5 V to +1.5 V, into a 50 W load
Range
20 mV
1 mV
to 2 V
, into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
Resolution
n DC accuracy
Offset
Page 4-22
"(2.0% of amplitude + 2 mV), offset: 0 V
Range
-0.5 V to 0.5 V, into a 50 W load
1-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-6: Main output (Cont.)
3
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
Resolution
1 mV
nAccuracy
Page 4-22
"1.5% of offset "10 mV,
(20 mV amplitude, waveform data: 0)
Pulse response
(Waveform data: -1 and 1, offset: 0 V, and filter: through)
nRise time (10% to 90%)
nFall time (10% to 90%)
Aberration, Typical
Page 4-35
x 480 ps (amplitude = 1.0 V
, calculated value y 729 MHz)
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
x 480 ps (amplitude = 1.0 V
, calculated value y 729 MHz)
"6% (amplitude + 1.0 V
, usingĂ6 GHz bandwidthĂoscilloĆ
pkĆpk
scope)
Flatness, Typical
"3% (after 20 ns from rise and fall edges)
Sinewave characteristics
(Clock: 4.0 GS/s, waveform points: 32, Signal frequency: 125 MHz,
amplitude: 1.0 V, offset: 0 V, filter: through)
Harmonics
x -40 dBc (DC to 1000 MHz)
x -50 dBc (DC to 1000 MHz)
x -85 dBc / Hz (at 10 kHz offset)
Noise
Phase Noise, Typical
Direct DA out (except option 02)
Amplitude
Range
20 mV
to 1 V
, into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
nDC Accuracy
Page 4-27
"(2% of Amplitude + 2 mV)
Resolution
1 mV
n DC offset accuracy
n Pulse response
Rise time (10% to 90%)
Page 4-27
Page 4-29
0 V " 10 mV, (20 mV amplitude, waveform data: 0)
pkĆpk
(Waveform data: -1 and 1, at 0.5 V
)
x 280 ps (calculated value y 1.25 GHz)
x 280 ps (calculated value y 1.25 GHz)
Fall time (10% to 90%)
Extended Bandwidth output
(option 02)
Amplitude
Range
500 mV
to 1 V
, into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
nDC Accuracy
Resolution
Page 4-31
"(2 % of Amplitude + 2 mV)
1 mV
n DC offset accuracy
n Pulse response
Rise time (10 % to 90 %)
Page 4-31
Page 4-33
0 V " 10 mV, (500 mV amplitude, waveform data: 0)
pkĆpk
(Waveform data: -1 and 1, at 1 V
)
x 175 ps (calculated value y 2 GHz)
x 175 ps (calculated value y 2 GHz)
Fall time (10 % to 90 %)
3
The characteristics are specified at the end of the SMA cable (012Ć1565Ć00) except for DC accuracy.
1-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-7: Filter
Characteristics
Type
Description
Bessel low pass filter, 200 MHz,100 MHz, 50 MHz, and 20 MHz
Rise time (10% to 90%), Typical
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
17 ns
7 ns
3.7 ns
2 ns
Group delay, Typical
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
200 MHz
18 ns
8 ns
4.7 ns
3 ns
Table 1-8: Auxiliary outputs
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
4
Marker
Number of markers
Level (Hi/Lo)
2 (Complementary). Marker1 and Marker1, Marker2 and Marker2
-1.10 V to +3.00 V, into a 50 W load
-2.20 V to +6.00 V, into a 1 MW load
Maximum Output
Resolution
2.5 V
, into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
0.05 V
n Accuracy
Page 4-50
"0.1 V "5 % of setting, into a 50 W load
Rise and fall times (20% to 80%),
Typical
150 ps (2 V
, Hi: +1 V, Lo: -1 V, into a 50 W load)
pkĆpk
Skew, Typical
70 ps
Period jitter, Typical
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-9.
Cycle to cycle jitter, Typical
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-10.
Connector
1/4 Clock output
Level
Front panel SMA connectors
ECL 100 K compatible (internally loaded in 50 W to -2 V and 47 W
series terminated)
Period jitter, Typical
Cycle to cycle jitter, Typical
Connector
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-9.
Measured by TDS694C-1MHD with TDSJIT1
Refer to Table 1-10.
Rear panel SMA connector
1-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-8: Auxiliary outputs (Cont.)
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
10 MHz Reference clock out
Amplitude, Typical
y 1.2 V
, into a 50 W load, Max 2.5 V
, open circuit
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
Impedance
50 W, AC coupling
Connector
Rear panel BNC connector
4
The characteristics are specified at the end of the SMA cable (012Ć1565Ć00).
Table 1-9: Period jitter
Clock frequency
Measurement
4 GS/s
2 GS/s
1 GS/s
Pk-Pk
15.1 ps
14.0 ps
StdDev
1.6 ps
2.6 ps
Pk-Pk
11.6 ps
20.2 ps
StdDev
1.9 ps
2.4 ps
Pk-Pk
13.4 ps
27.5 ps
StdDev
2.5 ps
1.9 ps
Marker output
1/4 Clock output
Table 1-10: Cycle to cycle jitter
Clock frequency
4 GS/s
2 GS/s
1 GS/s
Pk-Pk
21.9 ps
28.7 ps
Measurement
Marker output
1/4 Clock output
StdDev
3.1 ps
4.8 ps
Pk-Pk
21.4 ps
44.5 ps
StdDev
3.2 ps
3.7 ps
Pk-Pk
26.1 ps
33.3 ps
StdDev
3.1 ps
3.1 ps
1-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-11: Auxiliary inputs
Characteristics
Description
PV reference page
5
Trigger input
Connector
Impedance
Rear panel BNC connector
1 kW or 50 W
Polarity (Trigger mode)/Slope
(Gated mode)
POS (positive) or NEG (negative)
Input voltage range
"10 V, into a 1 kW load
"5 V, into a 50 W load
Threshold
Level
-5.0 V to 5.0 V
"5% of level " 0.1 V
0.1 V
n Accuracy
Page 4-37
Resolution
Triggered mode
Minimum pulse width
Trigger holdoff time
See Figure 1-1.
10 ns, 0.2 V amplitude
x 109.5 clocks + 500 ns
Delay to analog out, Typical
Gated mode
211.5 clocks + 17 ns (Output: Norm, Filter: Through)
Minimum pulse width
Gate holdoff time
1152 clocks + 10 ns, 0.2 V amplitude
x 1920 clock + 20 ns
Delay to analog out, Typical
(1335 to 1499.5) clocks + 9 ns (Output: Norm, Filter: Through)
5
The characteristics are specified at the end of the BNC cable (012Ć0482Ć00).
1-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Trigger Holdoff (109.5
clocks + 500 ns)
External Trigger
Delay to analog output
(211.5 clocks + 17 ns)
Analog output
(Filter:ĂThrough)
1 Clock
Marker delay to analog output
(ĂNormal output : 3Ăns typical,
Ă Direct output : - 500ĂpsĂtypicalĂ
option 02
: - 1..2ns typical)
Marker output
m0
m1
m2
m3
(ĂMarker Skew : 70 psĂtypicalĂĂ)
Figure 1-1: Signal timing
1-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-12: Event Input
Characteristics
Connector
Description
9Ćpin, D type on the rear panel
4 bits
Number of events
Input signal
4 event bits and Strobe
TTL level
Threshold
Maximum input
Impedance
0 V to + 5 V (DC + peak AC)
1 kW, pullĆup to +3.3 V
Enhanced mode
Minimum pulse width
Event holdoff time
320 clocks + 10 ns
x 896 clocks + 20 ns
Delay to analog out, Typical
(Jump timing: ASYNC)
(Output: Norm, Filter: Through)
Strobe: On
Strobe: Off
1627.5 clocks + 7 ns
1883.5 clocks + 5 ns
Event input to strobe input
Setup time
192 clocks + 10 ns
192 clocks + 10 ns
Hold time
Table 1-13: 10 MHz reference clock input
Characteristics
Description
0.2 V to 3.0 V
Input voltage range
(into a 50 W load, AC coupling)
pkĆpk
Maximum "10 V
50 W, AC coupling
10 MHz "0.1 MHz
Impedance
Reference frequency
Connector
Rear panel BNC connector
1-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-14: Function generatorĂ(FG)
Characteristics
Operation Mode
Waveform Shape
Frequency
Amplitude
Description
Continuous mode only
Sine, Triangle, Square, Ramp, Pulse, DC
1.000 Hz to 400.0 MHz
Range
0.020 V
1 mV
to 2.000 V
, into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
Resolution
Offset (except option 02)
Range
-0.500 V to +0.500 V, into a 50 W load
Resolution
1 mV
DC waveform only
-0.500 V to +0.500 V, into a 50 W load
1 mV
DC Level (except option 02)
Range
Resolution
Polarity
Normal, Inverted
Duty
Range
0.1Ă% to 99.9Ă%
Resolution
Frequency
Resolution
0.1Ă%
0.5Ă%
1.0Ă%
2.0Ă%
2.5Ă%
4.0Ă%
5.0Ă%
10.0Ă%
1.000ĂHz to 4.000ĂMHz
4.001ĂMHz to 20.00ĂMHz
20.01ĂMHz to 40.00ĂMHz
40.01ĂMHz to 80.00ĂMHz
80.01ĂMHz to 100.0ĂMHz
100.1ĂMHz to 160.0ĂMHz
160.1ĂMHz to 200.0ĂMHz
200.1ĂMHz to 400.0ĂMHz
Marker Out
Pulse Width
Mrker1
Hi : 0Ă% to 20Ă% of 1 waveform period
Lo : 20% to 100 % of 1 waveform period
Marker2
Hi : 0 % to 50 % of 1 waveform period
Lo : 50 % to 100 % of 1 waveform period
Hi : 0 % to 52 % of 1 waveform period
Lo : 52 % to 100 % of 1 waveform periodat frequency range is 100.1MHz to 160.0MHz
Level
Hi
2.0 V min into a 50 W load
Lo
0 V max into a 50 W load
1-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-15: Displayand timer
Characteristics
Display
Description
Display area
Horizontal: 130.6 mm (5.14 in)
Vertical:
97.0 mm (3.81 in)
Resolution
Size
640 (H) 480 (V) pixels
16 cm (6.4 in) diag. LCD
Table 1-16: AC line power
Characteristics
Rating voltage
Description
100 VAC to 240 VAC, CAT II
90 VAC to 250 VAC
48 Hz to 63 Hz
220 VA
Voltage range
Frequency range
Maximum power consumption
Maximum current
Fuse rating
5 A
10 A fast, 250 V, UL 198G (3 AG)
5 A (T), 250 V, IEC 127
Table 1-17: Timer
Characteristics
Timer
Description
Operation time
Type
6 years
Lithium battery 3 V, 190 mAh
Table 1-18: Interface connectors
Characteristics
GPIB
Description
24Ćpin, IEEE 488.1 connector on the rear panel
100/10 BASEĆT, RJĆ45 connector on the rear panel
6Ćpin, miniĆDIN connector on the rear panel
Ethernet
Keyboard connector
1-13
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-19: Installation requirement
Characteristics
Heat dissipation
Maximum power
Surge current
Description
220 VA (maximum line current: 3 A , at 50 Hz)
rms
30 A (25_ C) peak for equal to or less than 5 line cycles,
after the instrument has been turned off for at least 30 seconds
Cooling clearance
Top
Bottom
2 cm (0.8 in)
2 cm (0.8 in)
NOTE: The feet on the bottom provide the required
clearance when set on a flat surface.
Sides
Rear
15 cm (6 in)
7.5 cm (3 in)
Table 1-20: Environmental
Characteristics
Atmospherics
Temperature
Operating
Description
+10_ C to +40_ C
Nonoperating
Relative humidity
Operating
-20_ C to +60_ C
20% to 80% (no condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 29.4_ C
Nonoperating
5% to 90% (no condensation)
Maximum wetĆbulb temperature 40.0_ C
(Hard disk drive restriction)
Altitude
Operating
Up to 3 km (10 000 ft)
Maximum operating temperature decreases 1_ C each 300 m (1 000 ft)
above 1.5 km (5 000 ft)
Nonoperating
Dynamics
Up to 12 km (40 000 ft)
Random vibration
Operating
2
2.65 m/s rms (0.27Grms), from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes
2
Nonoperating
Shock
22.36 m/s rms (2.28Grms), from 5 Hz to 500 Hz, 10 minutes
2
Nonoperating
294 m/s (30 G), halfĆsine, 11 ms duration
1-14
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-21: Mechanical
Characteristics
Description
Net weight (without package)
Dimensions (without package)
14.1 kg (31.1 lb)
Height
177 mm (6.97 in)
193 mm (7.60 in) with Feet
Width
424 mm (16.69 in)
433 mm (17.05 in) with Handle
Length
470 mm (18.50 in)
508 mm (20.00 in) with Rear Feet
Net weight (with package)
Dimensions (with package)
24.5 kg (54.0 lb)
Height
Width
400 mm (15.75 in)
550 mm (21.65 in)
700 mm (27.56 in)
Length
177 mm
(6.97 in)
193 mm
(7.60 in)
424 mm
(16.69 in)
470 mm
(18.50 in)
433 mm
(17.05 in)
508 mm
(20.00 in)
Figure 1-2: Dimensions
1-15
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Certification and Compliances
The certification and compliances for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator are listed in Table 1–22. See Table 1–23 for installation categories and
pollution degree descriptions.
Table 1-22: Certifications and compliances
Characteristics
Description
EC declaration of conformity
EC council EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, amended by 89/336/EEC; EN61326-1: 1997
Product Family Standard for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, and
Laboratory Use-EMC Requirements.
Emissions:
EN 61326
EMC requirements for class A electrical equipment for
measurement control and laboratory use.
AC power line harmonic emissions
EN 61000Ć3Ć2
Immunity:
IEC 61000Ć4Ć2
IEC 61000Ć4Ć3
IEC 61000Ć4Ć4
IEC 61000Ć4Ć5
IEC 61000Ć4Ć6
Electrostatic Discharge Immunity
Radiated RF Electromagnetic Field Immunity
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst Immunity
Surge Immunity
Conducted Disturbances Induced by RF Field Immunity
Power Line Interruption Immunity
6
IEC 61000Ć4Ć11
Compliance was demonstrated to the following specification as listed in the Official Journal
of the European Communities:
Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC
EN 61010Ć1/A2:1995
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measureĆ
ment, control, and laboratory use
Australia/New Zealand declaration of
conformity - EMC
Conforms with the following standards in accordance with the Electromagnetic CompatibiliĆ
ty Framework:
AS/NZS 2064.1/2
Class A radiated and Conducted Emissions
Safety
UL3111Ć1 - Standard for electrical measuring and test equipment
ThirdĂpartyĂcertification
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1010.1 - Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measureĆ
ment, control and laboratory use
SelfĂdeclaration
IEC 61010Ć1/A2:1995 - Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,
control, and laboratory use
Installation category
Power input Ć Installation Category II (as defined in IEC 61010Ć1, Annex J)
Pollution Degree 2 (as defined in IEC 61010Ć1)
Pollution degree
6
Up to 200 mV noise is allowed on the output during this test.
pĆp
1-16
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Table 1-23: Installation category and pollution degree descriptions
Characteristics
Description
Installation category
Terminals on this product may have different installation category designations. The
installation categories are:
Category
Descriptions
CAT III
DistributionĆlevel mains (usually permanently connected).
Equipment at this level is typically in a fixed industrial
location.
CAT II
CAT I
LocalĆlevel mains (wall sockets). Equipment at this level
includes appliances, portable tools, and similar products.
Equipment is usually cordĆconnected.
Secondary (signal level) or battery operated circuits of
electronic equipment
Pollution degree
A measure of the contaminants that can occur in the environment around and within a
product. Typically, the internal environment inside a product is considered to be the same
as the external. Products should be used only in the environment for which they are rated.
Category
Descriptions
Pollution Degree 1
No pollution or only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
Products in this category are generally encapsulated,
hermetically sealed, or located in cleanrooms.
Pollution Degree 2
Pollution Degree 3
Pollution Degree 4
Normally only dry, nonconductive pollution occurs.
Occasionally a temporary conductivity that is caused by
condensation must be expected. This location is a typical
office/home environment. Temporary condensation occurs
only when the product is out of service.
Conductive pollution, or dry, nonconductive pollution that
becomes conductive due to condensation. These are
sheltered locations where neither temperature nor humidity is
controlled. The area is protected from direct sunshine, rain,
or direct wind.
Pollution that generates persistent conductivity through
conductive dust, rain, or snow. Typical outdoor locations.
1-17
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
1-18
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
This subsection provides the following information:
H
H
H
H
Supplying Operating Power
Operating Environment
Installation
Repackaging Instructions
Supplying Operating Power
WARNING. To avoid equipment failure and potential fire or personal shock
hazards, do not exceed the maximum rated operating voltage of 250 V between
the voltage-to-ground (earth) and either pole of the power source. The AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator operates from a single-phase power source and
has a three-wire power cord with a two-pole, three-terminal grounding plug.
Also, before making a connection to the power source, be sure the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator has a suitable two-pole, three-terminal ground-
ing-type plug.
To avoid personal shock, do not touch any conductive parts. All accessible
conductive parts are directly connected through the grounding conductor of the
power cord to the grounded (earth) contact of the power plug. The AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator is safety Class 1 equipment (IEC designation).
To prevent electrical shock, remove all power from the instrument, turn the
PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on the back panel to OFF, and disconnect the
power cord from the instrument. Some components in the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator are still connected to line voltage after toggling the
instrument to Standby from the front panel ON/STBY button.
Power Cord Information
A power cord with the appropriate plug configuration is supplied with each
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. Table 2–1 provides color-coding
identification for the power cord conductors. If you require a power cord other
than the one supplied, refer to Table 2–2.
2-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Table 2-1: PowerĆcord conductor identification
Conductor
Color
Alternate Color
Black
Ungrounded (Line)
Grounded (Neutral)
Grounded (Earthing)
Brown
Light Blue
Green/Yellow
White
Green
Table 2-2: Power cord identification
Plug configuration
Normal usage
Option number
North America
125 V
Standard
Europe
230 V
A1
United Kingdom
230 V
A2
Australia
230 V
A3
Switzerland
230 V
A5
China
230 V
AC
A99
No power cord supplied.
2-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Operating Voltage
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator operates with any line voltage from
90 to 250 VACRMS with any line frequency from 48 to 63 Hz. There are two
fuses, either of which may be used throughout the line voltage and frequency
ranges. The two fuses are not interchangeable as each requires a different fuse
cap.
Memory Backup Power
Memory modules with on-board batteries allow the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator to retain only internal clock data upon loss of the AC power
source.
To set the date and time in the waveform generator, see the Reference:Internal
Clock (Date and Time) section of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
user manual.
Operating Environment
The following environmental requirements are provided to ensure proper
operation and long instrument life.
Operating Temperature
Operate the Waveform Generator where the ambient air temperature ranges from
10_ C to +40_ C (50_ F to +104_ F). Store the Waveform Generator at ambient
temperatures from –20_ C to +60_ C (–4_ F to +140_ F). After storage at
temperatures outside the operating limits, allow the chassis to stabilize to a safe
operating temperature before applying power.
Ventilation Requirements
The Waveform Generator is cooled by air drawn in and then exhausted through
the cabinet side panels by an internal fan. To ensure proper cooling of the
Waveform Generator, allow at least 15 cm (6 in) clearance on both sides, 2.0 cm
(0.8 in) on the top and bottom, and 7.5 cm (3 in) at the rear of the Waveform
Generator. (The feet on the bottom of the Waveform Generator provide the
required clearance when set on flat surfaces.)
CAUTION. When the air flow is restricted and the temperature of the DAC module
surface exceeds 80_ C, the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator may
temporarily shut down to protect the internal modules. To prevent temporary
shutdown of the waveform generator, do not restrict air flow through the chassis.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator displays the message “Power fail
or out of temperature limit” before shutting down.
If the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator shuts down unexpectedly, create
more ventilation around the waveform generator. Wait a few minutes to allow
cool down and then switch the power on again.
2-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Installation
Before installation, refer to the Safety Summary section at the front of this
manual for power source, grounding, and other safety information.
Environment
Verify that you have the correct operating environment.
CAUTION. Damage to the instrument can occur if it is powered on at tempera-
tures outside the specified temperature range.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator operates correctly in ambient
temperatures from +10_ C to +40_ C (50_ F to +104_ F) and relative humidity
from 20% to 80% with no condensation. If the instrument is stored at tempera-
tures outside this range, do not switch on the power until the chassis is within the
operating temperature range. For detailed operating environment information,
refer to Specifications on page 1–3 and 1–14.
NOTE. If you are installing the instrument in a rack, refer to the instruction sheet
that accompanies the rack-mounting kit for proper installation procedures.
Verify that there is nothing blocking the flow of air at the fan and air intake
holes. The instrument exhausts air using the internal fan. Create open space at the
sides of the instrument so that it does not overheat. The following are the
minimum space requirements for air flow around the instrument:
Rear
Left and right
7.5 cm (3 in)
15.0 cm (6 in)
Top and bottom 2 cm (0.8 in)
(The feet on the bottom of the instrument provide the required clearance
when set on a flat surface.)
2-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
NOTE. If the air flow is restricted and the internal temperature of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator exceeds the proper operating temperature range,
the instrument temporarily shuts down to protect the internal modules from
overheating. To prevent temporary shutdown of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator do not restrict air flow through the chassis.
If the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator shuts down unexpectedly,
improve the ventilation around the waveform generator and wait a few minutes to
allow it to cool down; then switch the power on again.
You cannot power on the instrument when the ambient temperature exceeds the
instrument temperature operation range. Wait until the instrument cools down, or
the ambient temperature decreases to valid operating temperatures, before
turning on the instrument again.
Check Fuse
Verify that the fuse is the proper type and rating.
Remove the fuse from the fuse holder on the rear panel and check the fuse. To
remove the fuse, turn it counterclockwise with a screwdriver while pressing in.
Table 2–3 lists the two fuse types and ratings.
WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is disconnected
from the socket before checking the line fuse.
Table 2-3: Fuse part numbers
Fuse
Fuse part number
Fuse, cartridge, 3AG, 10A, 250 VAC, FAST, 6.35 mm x 31.75 mm 159Ć0407ĆXX
(0.25 in × 1.25 in)
Fuse, cartridge, DIN 5 x 20 mm, 5A, 250 V Slow Blow,
5 mm x 20 mm (0.197 in x 0.788 in) (IEC 127)
159Ć0210ĆXX
NOTE. The second fuse listed in the table above is approved under the IEC
standards. This fuse is used in equipment sold in the European market.
Table 2-4: Fuse cap part numbers
Fuse cap
Fuse cap part number
200Ć2264ĆXX
Cap, fuseholder, 3AG fuses
Cap, fuseholder, 5x20 mm fuses
200Ć2265ĆXX
2-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
NOTE. The second fuse listed in the table on page 2–5 is approved under the
IEC standards. This fuse is used in equipment sold in the European market.
2-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Check Voltage Settings
Connect PowerCord
Standby Power
Check that you have the proper electrical connections. The AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator operates within the following power supply voltage and
frequency ranges:
Line voltage range
Line frequency
100 - 240 V
48 - 63 Hz
220 VA
Maximum power
Connect the proper power cord from the rear panel power connector to the power
system.
NOTE. The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is shipped with a 115 V
power cord. If the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is to be used with
230 V power, the power cord must be replaced with one appropriate for the
power source used. See Table 2–2 for the available power cord types.
Push the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH (shown in Figure 2–1) on the rear
panel of the instrument. Power is now applied to the instrument standby circuitry.
Once the instrument is installed, leave the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on
and use the ON/STBY switch, located on the front panel, to toggle the instru-
ment between ON and STBY.
PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH
Fuse
Power connector
Figure 2-1: Rearpanel powerswitch, fuse holder, and powerconnector
2-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Power On
To power on the instrument, push the ON/STBY switch (shown in Figure 2–2)
on the lower left side of the front panel. Check that the fan is blowing air out of
the instrument.
NOTE. The instrument must be warmed up for at least 20 minutes and the clock
calibrated to operate at its optimum accuracy.
ON/STBY switch
Figure 2-2: Location of the ON/STBY switch
2-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
PowerĆOn Diagnostics
The instrument automatically runs power-on self tests to check that the instru-
ment is operating normally.
Check the results of the power-on self tests. If all the diagnostic tests are
completed without error, the instrument displays Pass and then the SETUP menu
screen.
If the system detects an error, the instrument displays Fail and the error code
number on the screen. You can still operate the instrument if you exit this state,
but the wave output accuracy is not guaranteed until the error is corrected. To
exit the diagnosis mode, push any button. The system goes to the SETUP menu
screen.
NOTE. Contact your local Tektronix Field Office or representative if the
instrument displays an error message. Make sure to record the error code
number.
Power Off
Power off the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator by toggling the ON/
STBY switch to the STBY position and turning the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH on the rear panel to OFF.
WARNING. To prevent electrical shock, remove all power from the instrument,
turn the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH on the back panel to OFF, and
disconnect the power cord from the instrument. Some components in the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator are still connected to line voltage after turning
off the instrument from the front panel ON/STBY button.
To prevent loss of data and/or damage to the hard disk, before the power off,
confirm that the hard disk LED on the lower right of the front panel does not
light or blink.
2-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Repackaging for Shipment
Use the original packaging material to return the instrument. If the original
packaging is unfit for use or is not available, repackage the instrument as
follows:
1. Obtain a corrugated cardboard shipping carton with dimensions of at least
three inches greater than the instrument dimensions and having a carton test
strength of at least 125 kg (275 lb).
2. If you are shipping the instrument to a Tektronix Service Center for repair or
calibration, attach a tag to the instrument with the following information:
H
H
Owner of the instrument (with address)
Name of a person at your firm who may be contacted if additional
information is needed
H
H
Complete instrument type and serial number
A description of the service required
3. Wrap the instrument with polyethylene sheeting or equivalent to protect the
outside finish and prevent entry of packing materials into the instrument.
4. Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly packing urethane foam
between the carton and the instrument, allowing for 7.62 cm (3 in) of
padding on each side (including top and bottom).
5. Seal the carton with shipping tape or with an industrial stapler.
6. Make sure that the Tektronix Service Center address and your return address
are placed on the carton in one or more prominent locations.
NOTE. To avoid damaging the instrument, do not ship it with a diskette inside the
floppy disk drive. When a diskette is inside the drive, the disk release button
protrudes and makes the button susceptible to damage.
2-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
Applying and Interrupting Power
Refer to the following information when you power on or power off the
instrument, or when power is interrupted due to an external power failure.
Power On
Upon power on, the Waveform Generator runs a power-on self check. If it passes,
the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator displays a Pass status message and
a prompt to press any key to continue. If this fails, the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator displays a diagnostic log that identifies the area(s) that
failed and a prompt to press any key to continue. Refer to the Maintenance
section for information on diagnostics and fault isolation.
Power Off
CAUTION. DO NOT power off the Waveform Generator when either running a
signal path compensation or when doing any of the adjustments described in the
Adjustment Procedures section. To do so might result in the loss of internally
stored adjustment constants.
Do not power off the instrument when doing operations that affect the data stored
in the memory. Wait for the instrument to finish the operation when doing
adjustments, saving waveforms, or saving setups.
Improper power off, toggling the instrument to STBY improperly, or unexpected
loss of power to the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator can result in
calibration data corruptions on the hard disk.
2-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preparation for Use
2-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
This section provides an overview of the following topics:
H
H
H
The Controls and Connectors subsection describes the instrument buttons,
controls, connectors, and typical screen displays.
The Menu Operations subsection describes how to use menus and enter
numeric and text values.
The Shortcut Controls subsection specifies the available shortcut buttons and
knobs that control instrument setup parameters.
H
H
The File Management subsection provides an overview of all file operations.
The Double Windows subsection explains how to split a file list in the Edit
screen. The function enables you to view the file lists of both the hard disk
and the floppy disk simultaneously.
H
H
The Quick View subsection explains how to view a waveform or pattern file
selected from a file list.
The Setup Overview subsection describes the SETUP screen and basic
operations.
Controls and Connectors
Front Panel
Figures 2–3 through 2–6 show the locations of the front panel controls and
rear–panel connectors.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the instrument, do not apply any external
voltage to the output connector or marker connector.
To prevent loss of data, data corruption, and damage to the hard disk, do not
push the eject button while the floppy disk or hard disk LED is on or blinking.
Doing so can cause data corruption and cause the instrument to hang up. If this
happens, toggle to STBY, turn PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to OFF, and then
turn PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH back on again.
2-13
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
SETUP menu button
APPL menu button
Displays the SETUP Main Menu for
setting the waveform output parameters.
Displays the APPL Main Menu for running
a specific application program to create
waveforms.
EDITmenu button
UTILITY menu button
Displays the EDITMain Menu for
creating or editing waveforms, as well as
performing directory and file tasks.
Displays the UTILITY Main Menu for
setting the instrument parameters.
Floppy disk drive
Arrow buttons
HARDCOPY button
Save or load the various types of data
created or used in the instrument to/from
the 3.5 inch 2HD floppy disk with
MSĆDOS format. You can also format a
floppy disk with this instrument.
Produces a hardcopy of the screen display,
which can be transferred, as a file, to the
hard disk, a floppy disk, and/or a networked
device.
Controls up, down, right, and left
movements of the cursor or a selected item;
for example, movements of a selected item
in a dialog box or popĆup menu.
See Figure 2-4
Bottom and side
bezel menu buttons
The bottom buttons call up
submenu, and the side buttons
execute more detailed operations
within the submenu.
See Figure 2-5
Output connectors
MARKER OUTconnectors
CLEAR MENU button
ON/STBY button
Outputs marker signals. Each channel is
equipped with two MARKER OUTconnectors.
If you use only one output connector for each
marker, you must terminate the other
Provides normal (CH1) and inverted
(CH1) waveforms.
The maximum output level is 2
This button is theON/STBY
switch in normal operation.
The PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH on the rear panel
must be on.
Cancels the current
operation and closes
the side and submenu.
The display can be
returned to the top level
by pushing this button
repeatedly.
V
pkĆpk
mode, and 1 V
into a 50 W load in Normal
connector using a SMA termination.
into a 50 W load
pkĆpk
in Direct mode and option 02. If you
use only one output connector, you
must terminate the other connector
using a 50 W termination.
PANEL LOCK LED indicator
CAUTION
The LED indicator is lit when the front panel
control is locked. You can lock the front panel
controls only through GPIB interface.
To prevent loss of data and/or damage to the hard
drive, before the power off, be sure to confirm the
floppy disk or hard drive LED is not on or blinking.
HDD LED indicator
CAUTION
The LED indicator is lit when the disk drive is in operation.
To prevent damage to the instrument, do not apply the
voltage to OUTPUT or MARKER connectors.
Figure 2-3: Front panel controls
2-14
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
TOGGLE button
General Purpose knob
Switches the active cursor on the waveform and pattern
editor. In the sequence editor, this button can be used to
cancel the numeric input mode and make the left and right
arrows available to move the highlight cursor.
Selects a menu item or adjusts a numeric value on the instrument. When
the knob icon is displayed on the screen next to an item, it indicates that
that item can be controlled with the general purpose knob.
SHIFT button
When you push a numeric or unit button while the
SHIFT LED is on, the function shown in blue
above a key is executed. The SHIFT button toggles
on and off. When the instrument displays the File
Name Input dialog box, you can input upper case
characters when the SHIFT LED is on. When you
exit the dialog box, the SHIFT LED also goes off.
Keypad
ENTER key
Enters numeric values. The keys G, M, k, m, m, n
and p are unit keys. The keys A, B, C, D, E and F
are used to enter a hexadecimal value. These keys
are accessed with the SHIFT button. The unit keys
also work like the ENTER key.
This ENTER key has the same
function as that found in the keypad.
CLR button
Clears text in an active text field.
Delete button
Deletes a character positioned to the left of the text cursor and
moves the cursor to the left by one character. This button does
not function when the text cursor is at the leftĆmost position.
Confirms the numeric or character string you typed and
enters it in the instrument. When using the general
purpose knob, push ENTER to confirm the settings.
INF button
Sets the Repeat Count to Inf. in the sequence editor. This button
can be used only for this purpose.
Figure 2-4: Front panel keypad area
2-15
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
QUICK EDIT button
Enters the QUICK EDIT mode from the waveform editor. This button
allows you to edit waveforms that have immediate effect on the output
signal. Use together with the VERTICAL andHORIZONTAL controls for
quick edit.
TRIGGER controls
Controls the trigger parameters.
RUN button
Enables waveform output. The signal
output depends on the RUN mode
settings.
Pushing the TRIGGER MENU button
displays the Trigger side menu. This
has the same effect as pushing
SETUP (front)! Trigger (bottom).
The LEVEL knob adjusts the trigger
level.
FORCE TRIGGER button
Pushing the FORCE TRIGGER button
generates an internal trigger event.
FORCE EVENT button
Pushing the FORCE EVENT button generates an
internal event signal.
VERTICAL controls
HORIZONTAL controls
Usedto control the output vertical axis parameters.
Usedto control the output horizontal axis parameters.
Pushing the VERTICAL MENU button displays the VERTICAL side menu.
This is the same as selecting SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom).
Pushing the HORIZONTAL MENU button displays the Horizontal side menu.
This is the same as selecting SETUP (front)! Horizontal (bottom).
The OFFSET knob adjusts the vertical offset.
The LEVEL/SCALE knob adjusts the amplitude.
When in Quick Edit mode, the OFFSET knob adjusts the horizontal position.
The SAMPLE RATE/SCALE knob adjusts the clock frequency.
Figure 2-5: Front panel keypad area
Rear Panel
Figure 2–6 shows the rear panel signal and power connectors.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the instrument, apply signals only within the
stipulated range to the INPUT connector.
Do not apply any external voltage to the OUTPUT connector.
2-16
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
TRIG IN connector
10 MHz REF IN connector
External 10 MHz reference
clock signal input.
External trigger signal
input.
1/4 CLOCK OUT connector
1/4 Sampling clock signal output.
10 MHz REF OUT connector
The internal 10 MHz clock reference signal is output when the
internal clock reference is selected. The external clock reference
signal is output when the external clock reference is selected.
PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH
The maximum output level is 1 V
"0.1V into 50 W load
pkĆpk
Applies power to all circuits. In addition to
this switch being on, the front panel
ON/STBY switch must also be turned on.
Power supply fuse holder
EVENT IN connector
100/10BASEĆT connector
IEEE STD 488 connector
Inputs external event signals. This
signal can be used for sequence
control in Enhanced mode.
Connect to the Ethernet
network.
A GPIB connector for remote
computer control through an
IEEE 488 standard parallel interface.
The 10 A fast blow and 5 A (T)
fuse are used for 115 V and
230 V systems, respectively.
KEYBOARD connector
DISPLAY MONITOR OUT
connector
Power connector
Connect to a standard PC
101Ćkey keyboard.
Connect the provided power cable to this
connector.
Connect to an external monitor.
Figure 2-6: Rear panel signal and power connectors
2-17
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Menu Operations
This section describes the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator menu system
and numeric and text input methods.
Menu System
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator uses menus to make selections.
There are four menu buttons labeled EDIT, SETUP, APPL, and UTILITY shown
in Figure 2–7. Pushing a menu button displays the corresponding screen and
menu buttons. These menus let you edit waveforms, initialize instrument
settings, define instrument operation, and specify waveform output parameters.
You select items within the displayed menu by pushing the bottom or side bezel
button nearest the menu item. These buttons consist of seven bottom buttons and
five side buttons as shown in Figure 2–7. These menu bezel buttons are referred
to as bottom menu buttons (or bottom buttons) and side menu buttons (or side
buttons).
The CLEAR MENU button cancels the current menu operation, clears the
current menus from the screen, and returns to the previous instrument state.
Menu buttons
Side menu bezel buttons
(side buttons)
Bottom menu bezel buttons
(bottom buttons)
CLEAR MENU button
Figure 2-7: Menu buttons, bezel menu buttons, and the CLEAR MENU button
2-18
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Menu Elements
Pushing a front panel menu button displays the screen and bottom menu items
associated with the button. You select a bottom menu item by pushing the button
directly below that menu item.
Pushing a bottom button displays a side menu, pop-up menu, list, or dialog box.
Figure 2–8 through 2–11 show examples of the side menu, pop-up menu and
dialog box, respectively.
Side menu
Bottom menu
Figure 2-8: Bottom and side menus
2-19
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Use a side menu button to display a side submenu, set a parameter, perform a
task, or cancel an operation. Table 2–5 describes the side menu button types.
Table 2-5: Side menu elements
Menu items Description
Executes the displayed funcĆ
tion immediately.
Menu items Description
Cannot be used in the current
instrument state (menu item is
grayed out).
Switches between two paramĆ
eters each time the side button
is pushed.
Allows making selections by
using the general purpose
knob.
Allows entering numeric values
using the numeric buttons or
the general purpose knob.
Displays submenu. Note that
the label on the item is folĆ
lowed by an ellipsis (...).
The pop-up menu example (see Figure 2–9), displays a list of choices. Use the
general purpose knob or the front panel arrow buttons to move up or down in the
list. Push the OK side button or the ENTER front-panel button to confirm the
selected item.
Figure 2-9: PopĆup menu example
The dialog box example as shown Figure 2–10 and the screen menu example
shown in Figure 2–11 displays a screen from which you make selections or enter
values. Use the front panel arrow buttons to select items or fields. A selected
field or item will be highlighted. Use the keypad buttons or the general purpose
knob to change values in the selected text/numeric fields or to change 1-of-N
2-20
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
fields. A 1-of-N field contains two or more choices. Only one choice can be
selected at a time.
Push the OK side button to confirm the dialog box. Push the Cancel side button
or the CLEAR MENU button to exit the dialog box without making any
changes.
Text/Numeric fields
1ĆofĆN choice
Figure 2-10: Dialog box example
Figure 2-11: Screen menu example
2-21
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Arrow Buttons
Use the use arrow buttons to move the cursor to a desired position.
Use y and b arrow buttons to move the cursor up or down in a pop-up menu,
make a selection in a dialog box, or move a cursor in the Editor menu.
Use a and ' arrow buttons to make a selection in a dialog box, move the input
caret when you enter numerics with the general purpose knob, or move a cursor
in the Editor menu.
CLEAR MENU button
Numeric Input
You can use the CLEAR MENU button on the front panel to cancel the bottom
menu selection or side menu selection just before you selected it.
You can enter numeric values by using either the numeric keypad or the general
purpose knob. If the side menu item displays a value, you can change this value
using the general purpose knob or numeric buttons.
Knob icon
Current Setting
Underscore
Figure 2-12: Knob icondisplayed inStatus Display area
General Purpose Knob. A knob icon with a numeric value that includes an
underscore character indicates that you can change the value at the underscore
location by using the general purpose knob or keypad buttons. By default, the
underscore character is positioned beneath the digit specified depending on the
parameters. You can only change the value represented by the digits at and to the
left of the underscore. Use the a and ' arrow buttons to move the underscore to
the desired position and then turn the general purpose knob to change the value.
If the numeric value displays the knob icon, but does not show the underscore,
then turn the general purpose knob to cycle through the predefined set of values.
When using the general purpose knob, values that you change in side menus and
menu screens take effect immediately. Values in pop-up menus are not effective
until you push the OK side button or the ENTER front panel button.
2-22
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Numeric Keypad. Figure 2–13 shows the numeric keypad and descriptions of the
button functions.
The ENTER button
enters the current value
into the instrument.
The SHIFT button enters
a character labeled in
blue. Push the SHIFT
button and then push the
keypad button.
The CLR button
deletes all characters
in the current field.
The ENTER button
enters the current value
into the instrument.
The DELETE button deletes the
character to the left of the caret.
Figure 2-13: Keypad buttons
The G, M, k, m, m, n, and p are unit buttons. The A, B, C, D, E, and F buttons
are used for entering hexadecimal values.
To use the numeric keypad to enter a value, position the caret where you want to
change a value and then push a keypad button. If you want to enter a unit value
labeled in blue just above each numeric button, push or hold down the SHIFT
button, and then push the corresponding numeric button.
H
H
H
The current unit remains the same if you do not change the unit. For
example, if you want to change from 100 MHz to 200 MHz, you can push 2,
0, 0, and the ENTER button.
Push the numeric buttons and the unit button to enter the specific unit. For
example, if you want to change 100 MS/s to 200 kS/s, push 2, 0, 0, and k
(SHIFT + 8).
The default time unit, s, or the default voltage unit, v, is selected if you enter
the numeric value, SHIFT button and then the ENTER button. For
example, if you want to change 100 ms to 1 s, push 1, SHIFT button and
then the ENTER button.
To enter or change more than one character, move the caret to the next position.
When you are finished entering values, push the ENTER button to confirm and
2-23
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
enter the changes. For example, to enter 200.5 ms, push 2, 0, 0, ., 5, m (SHIFT +
4),and ENTER.
When you enter a value larger than the maximum value in the parameter range,
the parameter will be set to the maximum value. When you enter a value smaller
than the minimum value, the minimum value will be set in the parameter. To set
to the maximum or minimum value, enter a larger value or smaller value. This is
useful when you do not know the defined range.
Note that the current unit remains the same when you push the ENTER button
after entering digits. For example, suppose that the Clock is currently set
to100.0 MS/s. When you press 5, 0 and the ENTER button in this order, the
Clock will be set to 50.0 MS/s. To set the Clock to 500 kS/s, press 0, ., 5 and the
ENTER button, or 5, 0, 0, SHIFT, and 8 button in this order.
Text Input
When you need to assign a name to a waveform file, equation, or IP address, the
instrument displays a text dialog box. See Figure 2–14. The text field is where
you enter or change an existing character string. The character palette is where
you select alphanumeric characters to enter in the text field. You can also select
equation or file names from the name list to enter in the text field.
To select a character from the character palette, use the general purpose knob to
highlight a character and then push the ENTER. Repeat this step until you have
entered all characters in the text field. By default, the character palette is
selected. To select text from a file name list, use the y and b arrow buttons to
move the knob icon to the file name list. Table 2–6 describes all the controls
available for entering and editing text.
2-24
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Caret
Text field
Characterpalette
Name list
Text field
Characterpalette
Text field
Figure 2-14: Three type of Input text dialog boxes
File Name Input
Verify that the character palette is highlighted and that the general purpose knob
is displayed. You cannot select characters if the character palette is not high-
lighted. Use the y and b arrow buttons to highlight the character palette, if
necessary.
Do the following steps to input the file name:
1. Push the y and b arrow buttons to move the caret in the text field.
2. Use the general purpose knob to select the character.
3. Push the ENTER button or
button to insert the selected character at the
caret position.
Repeat step 1 through step 3 to input the file name.
The current directory file list is displayed in the character palette field. By
default, the file is stored in the current directory. If you want to store the file in
another directory, use the general purpose knob to move to another directory. If
you want to store the file in another drive, push DRIVE... (side) to change the
drive. You can select the Up Level, Down Level (side) to move to another
directory.
2-25
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
4. Push DRIVE... (side) to change the drive. Use the general purpose knob or
y and b arrow buttons to select the drive in the select drive dialog box and
push OK (side).
5. Push Up Level (side) to move up a directory. You cannot move up the
directory if you are at the highest level directory.
6. Press y and b arrow button to activate the file list if you want to move
down the directory list.
7. Use the general purpose knob to select the directory and push Down Level
(side).
8. Press y and b arrow button to activate the text field and input the file
name.
Figure 2-15: Input Filename dialog box
Table 2-6: Text input button functions
Control
Description
General purpose knob
Selects the character to insert into the text field.
Moves the character insertion caret left or right in the text field.
a and ' arrow buttons
Changes the knob selection area the character palette and the
filename list.
b and y arrow buttons
ENTER button
Inserts the selected character or character string into the text field.
Deletes one character to the left of the caret.
button
2-26
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Table 2-6: Text input button functions (cont.)
Control
Description
CLR button
Numeric buttons
SHIFT button
Clears the entire text field.
Enters numeric characters into the text field.
Enters a selected character in upper case. When you push the
SHIFT button, the SHIFT LED lights. When the dialog box
disappears, the SHIFT LED light turns off.
Shortcut Controls
Figure 2–16 shows the shortcut buttons and knobs that control specific instru-
ment setup parameters. Using the shortcut controls lets you adjust the output
setup parameters even while you are displaying another menu. Table 2–7
describes the shortcut controls.
Figure 2-16: Shortcut controls
Table 2-7: Shortcut controls
Controls
Description
VERTICAL
Displays the Vertical side menu. This is the same operation as
selecting SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom).
Adjusts the vertical offset parameters. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom)! Offset (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob. (except option 02)
Adjusts the amplitude parameters. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Vertical (bottom)! Amplitude (side) and then turning
the general purpose knob.
2-27
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Table 2-7: Shortcut controls (cont.)
Controls
Description
HORIZONTAL
Displays the Horizontal side menu. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Horizontal (bottom).
Adjusts the clock setting. This is the same as selecting SETUP
(front)! Horizontal (bottom)! Clock (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob.
TRIGGER
Displays the Trigger side menu. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Trigger (bottom).
Adjusts the trigger level setting. This is the same as selecting
SETUP (front)! Trigger (bottom)! Level (side), and then turning the
general purpose knob.
File management
This section provides an overview of the file operations for performing file
management tasks.
Name and location
File Type Suffixes. The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator uses numerous
file formats to hold different types of data. These file types are listed in
Table 2–8. Note that the instrument checks the file format and processes the file
based on its content regardless of the file suffix.
Table 2-8: AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator file types
File type
Description
Waveform file
Uses the .wfm or .WFM file suffix. Contains waveform data.
All signal data must be in waveform format before it can be
output. Created with the waveform editor, by compiling an
equation file, or when importing waveforms from external
equipment, and created waveform data by application.
Pattern file
Uses the .pat or .PAT file suffix. Contains pattern data.
Created with the pattern editor.
Sequence file
Uses the .seq or .SEQ file suffix. Contains waveform
sequence and trigger data. Created with the sequence
editor.
Equation file
Uses the .equ or .EQU file suffix. Contains equations that
describe a waveform. Created with the equation/text editor.
2-28
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Table 2-8: AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator file types (cont.)
File type
Description
Text file
Uses the .txt or .TXT file suffix. Contains ASCII text. Created
with the equation/text editor. And setting parameter file of
APPL Digital Modulation.
Setup file
Uses the .set or .SET file suffix. Contains instrument setup
and configuration data. Created from the SETUP menu.
Locating Files. There are three locations for storing waveform data on the
AWG710 Series Arbitrary Waveform Generator. Data can be stored on the
instrument hard disk drive, the floppy disk drive, or a remote storage device
accessible through the Ethernet interface. If the file you want to load is not on
the current drive, use the SETUP menu main screen Drive and Directory bottom
menu buttons to open the side menus to change the current drive location.
Table 2–9 describes the Drive and Directory bottom buttons.
Table 2-9: Drive and directory menus
Bottom
menu
Side menu
Description
Drive
Main
Floppy
Net1
Net2
Net3
Changes the instrument current drive. To select a drive,
push theappropriatesidemenu button. Notethat theremust
be a floppy disk inserted in the instrument floppy disk drive
to select the floppy drive.
Note that the label Net1, Net2, and Net3 vary depending on
thenet namesettings in theUTILITY menu.
Directory
Up Level
Moves up a directory level.
Down Level
Moves down a directory level. To move down a directory
level, select a directory name in the popĆup list, and then
push theDown Level sidebutton. Thefilenamelist changes
to show thecontents of thedirectory.
Creates a directory at the current level. To create a directory,
push theMakeDirectory sidebutton to display theInput
New Directory Name dialog box. Enter the directory name in
thenamefield, then push theOK sidebutton. The
MakeDirectory
instrument creates the new directory.
Archive
Extract
Creates a new file (.tar format) for archive from selected
directory. The archived file keeps hierarchic structure.
Restorethearchived file(.tar) to thecurrent directory.
2-29
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
NOTE. In the following procedures, you may have to push the EDIT button twice
to exit the editor. When the instrument does not display the file list, push the
EDIT button again. If you are prompted, refer to Saving Files on page 2–33.
Copying Files
You can copy files in from a double window or a single window. In a double
window, push the Copy button to copy the selected file in the active window into
the desired window.
Copying files in double windows. Do the following steps to copy files selected in
the active window:
1. Push EDIT (front) button and select the file to copy.
2. Push Window (bottom)! Window (side) to select Double.
Two file windows are displayed.
3. Push Select (side) to select the active window.
4. Push Directory (bottom)! Up Level, Down Level, or Make Directory
(side) to select the destination.
5. Push Select (side) to activate the window into which you are going to copy
the file and then select the file.
6. Push File (bottom)! Copy (side) to copy the file to the destination as the
same file name.
If the directory name is the same as the destination directory name, you will
be asked to confirm to overwrite the file.
Copying files in single window. Do the following steps to copy files selected in
single window:
1. Push EDIT (front) button and select the file to copy.
2. Push File (bottom)! Copy (side) and select the file name and destination.
3. Push OK (side) to copy the file.
The file is copied and renamed.
NOTE. For additional file copying and file moving procedures, refer to Double
Windows on page 2–36.
2-30
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Moving Files
To move a file in the double window, do the following steps:
1. Push EDIT (front) button and select the file to copy.
2. Push Window (bottom)! Window (side) to select Double.
Two file windows are displayed.
3. Push Select (side) to select the active window.
4. Push Directory (bottom)! Up Level, Down Level, or Make Directory
(side) to select the destination.
5. Push Select (side) to activate the window into which you are going to move
the file and then select the file.
6. Push File (bottom)! Move (side) to move the file to the destination.
If the directory name is the same as the destination directory name, you will
be asked to confirm to overwrite the file.
Renaming Files
The EDIT menu screen allows you to rename files. Do the following steps to
rename a file:
1. Push EDIT (front).
The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to rename.
3. Push File (bottom)! Rename (side).
4. Enter the new name for the file in the file name field.
5. Push OK (side).
The file is renamed.
2-31
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Deleting Files
You can delete a file or directory by doing the following steps:
NOTE. You cannot delete a file or directory if the file or directory is set to ’read
only’. Also, you can only delete a directory if the directory is empty.
1. Push EDIT (front).
The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to delete.
3. Push File (bottom)! Delete (side). The instrument displays a message box
asking you to confirm deleting the file.
4. Push OK (side) to delete the file or Cancel to cancel the operation and keep
the file.
You can also delete all files on the current drive and directory by doing the
following steps:
1. Push EDIT (front)! File (bottom)! Delete All (side).
The instrument displays a message box asking you to confirm deleting all
files.
2. Push OK (side) to delete all files or Cancel to cancel the operation and keep
all files.
Read Only Attribute
To change the read only or read/write attributes on a file, do the following steps:
1. Push EDIT (front).
The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to change the attribute.
3. Push File (bottom)! Attribute xxxx (side).
The xxxx is the Read/Write or Read Only attribute of the selected file. Pushing
this side button immediately changes the file attribute.
Files with a read only attribute are identified by
icon. See Figure 2–17.
icon, and the directories by
2-32
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Directory with read only
File with read only
Attribute
side button
Figure 2-17: Files and directories with read only attribute
Saving Files
Saving files takes place from within each editor screen. You have the choice of
saving your waveform data to the current file name or to a new file name. To
save a waveform to its current file name, push File (bottom)! Save (pop-up)!
OK (side).
If you are saving a waveform for the first time, the instrument opens the Input
Filename dialog box as shown in Figure 2–18. Use this dialog box to enter a file
name. If necessary, you can select a different storage media or directory by
pushing the Drive... side menu button. When you are done entering the file
name, push the OK side button or the front panel ENTER button to close the
dialog box and save the file.
Figure 2-18: Input filename dialog box
2-33
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
NOTE. When you exit an editor without saving edited data, the instrument
displays the message Save the changes you made? Push the Yes side button to
save the waveform data.
To save waveform data to a new file name, push File (bottom)! Save As
(pop-up)! OK (side). The instrument opens the Input Filename dialog box as
shown in Figure 2–18. Use this dialog box to enter a file name. If necessary, you
can select a storage media or directory by pushing the Drive... side menu button.
When you are done entering the file name, push the front panel ENTER button
to close the dialog box and save the file.
If you are saving a file with a record length larger than 64 data points, the
instrument needs to adjust the record length to meet internal memory record
length requirements. The instrument displays one of the messages shown in
Table 2–10. Select one of the messages and push the OK side button to accept
the recommended change or cancel the save and then edit the file to satisfy the
data record length requirements.
Table 2-10: Waveform record length adjustment messages
Message
Description
Leave it as is
The data is saved, as is, without making changes. The instrument will
display an error message if you try to load a file that does not meet the
instrument waveform constraints.
Append 0
With LevelĆ0 data added after the data, a file with a data length meeting
the requirements is created.
Expand
With the waveform data expanded, a file with a data length meeting the
requirements is created.
Expand with Clock
With the waveform data expanded, a file with a data length meeting the
requirements is created. In addition, the clock frequency increases
without change in scaling factor. The settings are saved in the file.
Repeat
With repetitions of the original data linked, a file with a data length
meeting the requirements is created.
Archive, Extract
To archive or extract files, do the following steps.
Archive. When you select Directory in the file list, you can make archives for all
the files in the directory and subdirectory.
1. Push EDIT (front).
The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to make archive files.
2-34
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
3. Push Directory (bottom)! Archive (side).
The instrument displays the Input archive name dialog box. By default, the
name of <directory name>.tar is automatically assigned. If necessary, you
can change the name.
4. Push OK button, and the archive file will be created in the current directory.
Extract. The archived file is extracted (restored) to the current directory. If the
directory already exists, the existing file will be overwritten.
1. Push EDIT (front).
The instrument displays the file list.
2. Select the file to extract.
3. Push Directory (bottom)! Extract (side).
The instrument extracts the archived files and directories to current directory.
Remote computer archive operation. AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
uses .tar format files. Use the tar command when you archive with a remote
computer environment. If you are PC user, use tar format archive tool.
The following list describes some restrictions on archive and extract operation.
H
H
H
Blocking factor is 20.
The file name including the file path in the directory is up to 100.
The depth of directory hierarchy is up to 16.
Use the following command to make archive file:
tar [–] cvf <tar file name> <file name or directory name>
Use the following command to extract archive file:
tar [–] xvf <tar file name>
2-35
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Double Windows
When the Window bottom button is displayed, you can split the file list in the
Edit Screen into two lists as shown in Figure 2–19. This function is called
Double Windows.
Upper Window
Lower Window
Figure 2-19: Double windows
In Double Windows, for example, you can display the hard disk and floppy disk
file lists or the file list of two separate directories. All the functions invoked from
the bottom buttons operate the same in single window except for the File
function.
The two most important functions used in the Double Windows are the Copy and
Move file operations. These operations are discussed in Window Operation be-
low.
Window Operation
The split windows are named Upper window and Lower window as indicated in
Figure 2–19. You must select a window for operation.
When you push EDIT (front) ! Window (bottom), the Window side button
appears. Push the Window side button to select Double. Double windows are
displayed. Push the Window side button once more to select Single. The display
returns to the single file list.
When you display the double windows, the Select side button will be available.
Push the Select side button to select Upper for file operation in the upper file list
2-36
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
window. Push the Select side button once more to select Lower for file operation
in the lower file list window.
Operation in Double
Windows
The most useful functions in the Double Windows may be those invoked from
the File bottom button. The functions available in the File bottom button are
described in Table 2–11.
Table 2-11: File operation in double windows
Operation
Description
Copy
Copies a file selected in a selected file list window into the destination
specified in the other file list window.
You cannot select the directory.
Copy All
Move
Copies all files in a selected file list window into the destination specified
in the other file list window.
You cannot copy the directory or directory structure.
Moves a file selected in a selected file list window into the destination
specified in the other file list window.
You cannot select the directory.
Move All
Moves all files in a selected file list window into the destination specified
in the other file list window.
You cannot move the directory or directory structure.
NOTE. You cannot use the Rename, Delete, Delete All, and Attribute side
buttons unless you display the single file list window.
When the files with the same file name exist in a destination in a copy or move
operation, the message Overwrite existing file <filename> appears. At the same
time, the Cancel, No, Yes to All and Yes side buttons appears. Press any of these
side buttons to continue the procedure. See Table 2–12.
2-37
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Figure 2-20: Overwrite confirmation
Table 2-12: Confirmation selection for copyĆall and moveĆall operations
Side menu
Cancel
No
Description
Cancels and stops copy or move operation.
Skips the copy or move operation for the file indicated in the message.
Yes to All
Overwrites all the files without displaying any messages until the
operation is finished.
Yes
Overwrites the file indicated in the message and proceeds with the
operation.
You cannot copy or move the directory. In the copy-all or move-all operations,
the message Directory cannot be copied appears if you try to move or copy a
directory. Press the OK side button to confirm and proceed with the operation.
Quick View
Before loading or handling a file, you may want to to look at the content of a file
to confirm the operation. The Quick View function displays the view window
and allows you to view a waveform or pattern file selected in a file list. This
function is always available when a file list is displayed on the screen. See
Figure 2–21.
2-38
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Figure 2-21: File list window examples in which quick view is available
Select a file from the file list window using the general purpose knob. Press the
SHIFT and ENTER front panel buttons simultaneously. The view window
displays the waveform or pattern as shown in Figure 2–22.
Figure 2-22: Viewing a file by quick view function
Push the OK side menu button to close the view window. You cannot view files
other than waveform or pattern in this function.
This function is always available when a file list window or file list dialog box is
displayed on the screen.
2-39
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Setup Overview
The Setup screen is where you load and set up the waveform for output. This
section gives you an overview of the Setup screen, how to load a file, how to set
the signal output parameters, and how to enable signal output. Refer to The Setup
Menu Screen in the Reference section of User manual for more information.
Main Setup Screen
Push the SETUP front panel button to display the main Setup screen. See
Figure 2–23. Table 2–13 describes the screen waveform parameter icons. Table
2–14 lists the bottom menu functions.
Run mode
Clock frequency
Instrument status
Waveform
parameter icons
Side
menu
area
Number of points for
loaded waveform
Bottom menu
.
Figure 2-23: Main Setup screen (small figure: option 02)
2-40
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Table 2-13: Setup screen parameter icons
Icon
Description
Icon
Description
Displays the file name of
the waveform, pattern, or
sequence file loaded for
output.
Displays the noise signal
level added.
Note: Use the View button
to display the loaded
waveform.
Displays the lowĆpass filter
setting through which the
waveform is passed.
(except option 02)
Indicates that the channel
output is enabled or disĆ
abled. If the switch is
shown open, that channel
output is disabled.
Displays the peakĆtoĆpeak
signalampiltude setting.
Indicates that the digital
output is enabled or disĆ
abled. If the switch is
shown open, that digital
output is disabled.
Displays the signal offset
setting.
(except option 02)
Displays the external input
added.
Table 2-14: Setup bottom menu buttons
Bottom menu
button
Description
Waveform/Sequence Displays the side menu for loading, viewing, and editing waveform
files.
Vertical
Displays the Vertical side menu for setting waveform peakĆtoĆpeak
amplitude, offset, lowĆpass filter, and other output parameters.
The product which has option 02 doesn't have offset and lowpass filter
function.
Horizontal
Run Mode
Trigger
Displays the Horizontal side menu for setting the clock source, clock
frequency, clock reference, and channel skew parameters.
Displays the Run Mode side menu for setting the instrument run mode.
Refer to Run Modes for an explanation of the different run modes.
Displays the Trigger side menu for setting trigger source, slope, level,
externaltrigger impedance, and intervalparameters.
Save/Restore
Displays the Save/Restore side menu to save and restore setup output
parameters.
2-41
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Composition and Setup of
Output Channel
Use the Setup menu to set up parameters for each channel as well as the
instrument.
Set up the file to load, amplitude, and run mode for each channel. Set up the
Horizontal, Run Mode, and Trigger for the instrument.
Loading a Waveform File
to Output
Do the following steps to load a waveform file into the Setup screen:
1. Push the Waveform/Sequence bottom menu button.
This opens the Waveform/Sequence side menu.
2. Push the Load... side button. The instrument opens the Select File list as
shown in Figure 2–24.
Figure 2-24: Setup waveform/sequence menu
3. Use the general purpose knob or arrow buttons to select the file name to
load. If the file you want to load is located in a different drive or directory,
use the side menu buttons to change the current drive/directory.
4. Push the ENTER front panel button or OK side button. The instrument
loads the file and displays the file name in the selected channel file icon.
Push the Cancel side button to exit the file load process.
The procedures above explain how to load a waveform or pattern into the
waveform memory, and/or sequence file into the sequence memory, which will
be scanned to output. The waveform memory, sequence memory, and the edit
2-42
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
buffer are completely independent. So, you can edit a waveform, pattern,
sequence or equation/text while outputting an another waveform or sequence.
However, when you push SETUP (front panel)! Waveform/Sequence
(bottom)! Edit (side) to copy the waveform in the waveform memory to the edit
buffer, you must save the currently edited waveform, pattern, sequence or
equation/text into a file.
You can enter the QUICK EDIT mode only from the waveform editor. When you
enter the QUICK EDIT mode, the instrument copies the data from the edit buffer
to the undo buffer. All the changes you make immediately reflect the data in the
edit buffer and the data in the waveform memory if that data is being loaded to
output.
Before loading, you can view a waveform or pattern. Refer to Quick View for
more detail.
Viewing a Waveform
To view the loaded waveform file, push the View side menu button. The
instrument opens a window on the screen that displays the waveform, as shown
in Figure 2–25. Push the OK side menu button or front panel ENTER button
to close the view window.
Figure 2-25: Viewing a file in the setup screen
2-43
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Note that the view function always display the waveform in the file that you
specified, but not the waveform in the waveform memory. Even when you
change the waveform with the editor and update the waveform memory, the view
function still displays the waveform before the update unless you do not save the
file.
Setting Waveform Output
Parameters
The Setup side menus provide commands for setting and adjusting waveform
output parameters. The steps for setting output parameters are discussed in detail
in the Reference section of the User manual. Table 2–15 provides an overview of
the Setup side menu operations.
Table 2-15: Setup output parameter operations
Bottom
button
Side
button
Description
Waveform/ Load...
Sequence
Displays the Select File dialog box that lists files in the current
drive and directory. Select a file to load or use the side menu
buttons to change drives and/or directories.
View
Displays the loaded file in a window. Push the OK side menu
button to close the view window.
Edit...
Opens the appropriate editor for the loaded file.
Vertical
Filter
Selects lowĆpass filter to insert into signal path. Filter values are
through (no filter), 1 MHz, 5 MHz, 20 MHz, and 50 MHz. Use the
general purpose knob to enter new values. (except option 02)
Amplitude
Sets the signal peakĆtoĆpeak amplitude in increments of 0.001 V.
The maximum value is 2 V
mode and 0.5 V
pkĆpk
or the keypad to enter new values.
(5 V with Option 05) in normal
in direct mode. Use the general purpose knob
pkĆpk
pkĆpk
Offset
Add...
Sets the signal offset value in increments of 0.001 V. The offset
voltage range is ±1 V. Use the general purpose knob or the
keypad to enter new values. (except option 02)
Adds the internal noise signal and/or external input signal to a
waveform. You can set the range of the internal noise generator
level within the limits of -140 to -95 dBm/Hz (-130 to -95
dBm/Hz with Option 05).
Output
Selects to connect the DAC output directly to the channel
connector. (except option 02)
2-44
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Table 2-15: Setup output parameter operations (cont.)
Bottom
button
Side
button
Description
Horizontal
Clock
Sets the clock sample rate from 10 kS/s to 200 MS/s.
Clock Src
Sets the clock source to either Internal or External. When set to
Internal, 10 MHz internal reference clock is used. When set to
External, a valid external clock signal is DC to 200 MHz with a
voltage level of 0.4 V
and up to ±2 V.
pkĆpk
Clock Ref
Skew...
Sets the reference clock source to either Internal or External. A
valid external clock signal is 10 MHz ±0.1 MHz with a voltage
level of 0.2 V to 3.0 V
.
pkĆpk
Sets the skew between Ch1, Ch2 and CH3 within -2.52 ns to 2.52
ns with 70 ps steps.
Run Mode
Trigger
Continuous Displays the Run Mode side menu for setting the instrument run
Triggered
Gated
Enhanced
mode. Refer to the Run Mode Menu subsection on page 3-4 for
an explanation of the different run modes.
Source
Slope
Level
Sets trigger source to Internal or External. If External is selected,
only the interval item is selectable.
Sets the trigger slope or gate polarity to Positive or Negative.
Sets the trigger signal level. The trigger level range is ±5.0 V in
0.1 V increments.
Impedance Sets the external trigger input line impedance to either 50 W or
1 kW.
Interval
Sets trigger interval from 1.0 ms to 10.0 s.
Save/ReĆ
store
Save Setup Save the setup parameters set by SETUP window as a setup file.
Restore
Setup
Restore a setup file.
Outputting a Waveform
To output a loaded waveform, push the CH (1) OUT and/or CH (1 )_OUT front
panel button(s), and then the front panel RUN button. The LEDs near each
button light to indicate they are enabled. The instrument outputs the waveform(s)
depending on the Run mode. You can turn either or both channel outputs on or
off while the instrument is running by pushing the CH (1) OUT or the CH (1)
OUT buttons. To stop the waveform output, push the RUN button so that the
LED light turns off.
2-45
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Basics
Saving and Restoring
Setup Parameters
The waveform or pattern file contains only waveform and clock information.
When you load a waveform or pattern file, the output signal will use the current
instrument setup parameters.
To save you from doing a manual setup procedure each time you load a
waveform, the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator lets you save setup
parameters in a setup file. You can then restore the saved settings for use with
waveforms.
Do the following steps to save the current setup parameters:
1. Push SETUP (front)! Save/Restore (bottom)! Save Setup (side).
The Select Setup Filename dialog box appears.
2. Enter a setup file name.
The suffix .set will appear at the end of the file name.
3. Push the OK side button.
The setup information is saved to the designated file.
Do the following steps to restore the setup parameters from a file:
1. Select SETUP (front)! Save/Restore (bottom)! Restore Setup (side).
2. Enter or select the setup file name to load.
3. Push the OK side button to load the file and restore the setup parameters, or
push the Cancel side button to exit the restore process without loading the
setup file.
2-46
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TheoryĂofĂOperation
This section presents an overview of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator hardware, data structures, and operating modes to allow you to take
full advantage of the capabilities of the waveform generator.
Interconnect Diagram
Figure 3–1 illustrates the waveform generator circuitry. This section describes
the hardware blocks that provide the background knowledge necessary to use the
instrument effectively.
CPU. The CPU controls the whole instrument using the GPIB interface, floppy
disk connection, 100/10BASE-T Ethernet connection, user interface through the
display screen and the front panel, and so on. See Figure 3–1.
3-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
CH 1
CH 1
10 MHz
RefOut
Analog
output
Clock
AWG Board
10 MHz
RefIn
Marker 1
Marker 1
Marker 2
Marker 2
1/4 Clock
output
Trigger input
Memory
Event input
GPIB conn
24 pin DĆSub
GPIB
LAN
Back
plane
LAN Conn
100/10
Base T
Connector
Board
LCD
CPU Board
Memory
Front panel
Memory
Monitor
output
Flash disk
10 MB
Fan
Fan
Fan
FDD
Hard disk
10 GB
Power
supply
Key board
or
Option 10
Flash disk
Figure 3-1: AWG710 interconnect diagram
3-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Block Diagram
Figure 3–2 shows the main hardware blocks that comprise the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
2
2
EXT
EVENT
IN
MARKER1
MARKER1
4
Event control
2
2
MARKER2
MARKER2
Trigger
control
EXT
TRIG
ĂIN
CH1
CH1
Analog
output
circuit
Memory
address control
Waveform
Ămemory
Shift
register
DAC
DAC ASIC
1/4
CLOCK
OUT
Frequency
control
Clock
output
Reference
oscillator
Phase
comparator
Loop
filter
DDS
ĂĂĂĂĂVCO
EXTĂREF
CLOCK
(10ĂMHz)
1/2048
ĂDivider
REF
CLOCK
OUT
(10ĂMHz)
Figure 3-2: AWG710 block diagram
3-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Clock Oscillator. You can select either the internal or external reference clock
source by using the SETUP horizontal menu.
If you select the external source, the reference signal connected to the 10 MHz
REF In connector on the rear panel will be used.
The internal clock is from the reference clock oscillator, which uses direct digital
synthesis (DDS). Figure 3–2 shows the clock oscillator configuration.
Trigger Control. The Trigger Control block controls the Memory Address Control
in the operation mode that you specified from the RUN MODE menu.
Waveform Memory and Shift Register. The Waveform Memory block has 8 bits for
waveform data and 2 bits per channel for markers, thus a total length of 16 M /32
M (option 01) points. You can set any value from 960 points to 16 M/32 M
(option 01) points for the length of the waveform data. It must be in increments
of 4.
The Shift Register block provides waveform data from the DAC at a rate of up to
4.0 GS/s.
RUN modes. Selecting a RUN mode from the SETUP menu causes one of the
following modes to operate the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. Table
3–1 lists the available run modes.
Table 3-1: Run modes
Modes
Descriptions
Continuous
Triggered
Consecutively output regardless of existence of a trigger signal.
The output signal is obtained once only when one of the following is input:
H
H
An external trigger signal from the TRIG IN connector on the rear panel.
A trigger signal generated using the FORCE TRIGGER button on the front
panel.
H
H
A trigger command from remote device.
If the SEQUENCE has been defined, the TRIGGERED output is obtained
once only according to the definition.
3-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Table 3-1: Run modes (Cont.)
Modes
Descriptions
Gated
The waveform is output only while:
H
H
An external trigger signal from the TRIG IN connector on the rear panel.
A gate signal through the FORCE TRIGGER button (on the rear panel) is
TRUE.
H
A control command such as trigger or event from remote device.
Enhanced
The waveform is obtained, in the order defined with the sequence, based on:
H
A trigger signal (for example, an external trigger signal from the TRIG IN
connector on the rear panel).
H
H
H
H
H
An external trigger signal from the TRIG IN connector on the rear panel.
An event signal from the EVENT IN connector on the rear panel.
An trigger signal from the FORCE TRIGGER button on the front panel.
An event signal from the FORCE EVENT button on the front panel.
A control command such as trigger, event or jump from remote device.
Analog Circuit. The Analog Circuit block contains the Filter, Attenuator, Output
Amplifier, Calibration and Offset Circuits. These circuits are used to process
signals generated from the DAC. Option 02 has Calibration Circuits only.
MemoryAddress Control. The Memory Address Control controls the addresses
used to read waveform memory data.
This block loads the first address of the waveform into the Address Counter that
was loaded into the waveform memory. It loads the waveform data length to the
Length Counter. The Address Counter specifies the point from which the
waveform was generated and the Length Counter waveform ending position.
The Address and Length Counters operate with clocks produced by quarter
frequency-division for the clocks from the clock oscillator.
If the repeat count value has been loaded in the Repeat Counter, the waveform is
generated the specified number of times.
This block controls the sequence to the event signals generated in Enhanced
Mode.
Figure 3–3 shows the relationship between the memory address control and the
waveform memory.
3-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Start
address
Address
counter
Waveform
length
Length
counter
Waveform
memory
Sequencer
Repeat
count
Repeat
counter
Clock
End of Waveform
Figure 3-3: Relationship between memory address control and waveform memory
3-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Signal Edit Process
This subsection describes the signal edit process.
Load the desired waveform data to be output into the waveform memory. New
waveform data can be created using waveform editors incorporated in the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. New data can also be created by
combining the following:
H
H
H
A sample waveform data distributed with floppy disks.
Previously created waveform data on the built-in hard disk.
Waveform data measured or created by other equipment, which has been
read through the network.
Digital waveform data is loaded to the waveform memory location. The memory
address control extracts the waveform data from memory, including the clock
speed and the specified order of waveforms relative to the trigger event control.
When the AWG is in the Run mode, the digital output is processed through a
high speed digital to analog converter (DAC). The output then goes through the
analog output amplifier to the offset and filter circuitry and to the output
connector.
Waveform Data Structure
The waveform data structure consists of analog waveform and digital pattern file
formats. The waveform file format includes 8-bits of resolution for the DAC
output and 2-bits for the digital marker output. The pattern file format includes
10-bits for digital output. (The AWG710 supports two digital marker outputs.)
The full scale resolution of the 8-bit DAC is represented by –1.0 to +1.0.
Waveform and pattern files use different internal formats and editors. The
waveform file format is composed of 4-byte little endian and 1-byte for each data
point and markers. The 4-bytes point data is expressed as an IEEE floating point
number. The pattern data file is composed of 2-bytes including data and markers.
Waveform files contain floating point numbers that maintain the mathematical
data precision necessary for waveform math operations such as multiplying,
dividing, adding, and subtracting. Waveform files may be edited, but are much
larger for an equivalent record length compared to pattern files.
Pattern files are most useful for minimizing file size and file transfer time
between the AWG and a PC.
For more details about file format, refer to the Data Transfer subsection in the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator Programmer manual.
3-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theory of Operation
Waveform Edit
To edit waveforms, the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator provides you
with Waveform, Pattern, Sequence, Equation, and Text Editors. See Table 3–2
for a description of those editors.
Table 3-2: Editors
Editors
Descriptions
Waveform Editor The Waveform Editor lets you create or edit a waveform that is displayed on
the screen. It enables you to create any waveform by an operation such as
cut and paste, partialinversion about the horizontalor verticalaxis, shift, or
scaling. This operation can be based on a standard waveform, such as a
sine or rectangular wave, or the previously created waveform.
The Waveform Editor also has a unique feature that edits a waveform with
waveform calculation functions (absolute value of waveform, differentiation/
integration, convolution, correlation, addition/subtraction/multiplication
between waveforms and so on).
Pattern Editor
The Pattern Editor dispal ys a digitalsignalpattern with a pattern data pal ced
in 8Ćbit creation waveform memory; it creates a digitalsignalpattern
according to the High/Low settings you made for the individualbits.
In addition to the functions supported by the Waveform Editor, the Pattern
Editor is capable of generating frequently used digital signals unique to
digitalsignasl and pseudo random patterns.
Sequence Editor The Sequence Editor lets you create a more complex waveform by
combining different types of waveform data that you created using the
Waveform and/or Pattern Editors. This editor also enables a Waveform
listing jump and output stop to take place. They follow the external event
information from the EVENT IN connector as well as the number of
repetitions and the order for the individualpieces of waveform data.
Text Editor
The Text Editor creates an equation, more exactly, a waveform by a method
of equations. When an equation is created using this editor, you must
perform a compile.
The Text Editor allows you to edit plain ASCII files. It should be used to edit
ASCII format waveform data originated from other equipment as well as this
instrument itself.
Quick Edit
The Quick Editor lets you modify and/or output any part of a waveform you are
currently editing with the Waveform Editor. This is done in real time. The data
between cursors can be scaled or shifted vertically and/or horizontally (using
Expand/Shift).
3-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
You can perform two types of Performance Verification procedures with this
product: Self Tests and Performance Tests. You may not need to perform all
these procedures, depending on what you want to accomplish.
H
H
Verify that the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is operating
correctly by running the self tests as described in the Self Tests subsection.
Advantages: These procedures require minimal time to perform, require no
additional equipment, and test the internal hardware of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
If a more extensive confirmation of performance is desired, complete the self
test, and then do the performance test beginning on page 4–7.
Advantages: These procedures add direct checking of warranted specifica-
tions. They require more time to perform and suitable test equipment is
required. (Refer to Equipment Required on page 4–8).
4-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Conventions
Throughout these procedures the following conventions apply:
H
Each test procedure uses the following general format:
Title of Test
Equipment Required
Prerequisites
Procedure
H
Each procedure consists of as many steps, substeps, and subparts as required
to do the test. Steps, substeps, and subparts are sequenced as follows:
1. First Step
a. First Substep
H
H
First Subpart
Second Subpart
b. Second Substep
2. Second Step
H
H
Instructions for menu selection use the following format: front-panel
BUTTON! Main Menu Button! Side Menu Button. For example, Push
UTILITY! System! Reset to Factory! OK
The name of the button or knob appears in boldface type:
Push EDIT; then Drive..., push Floppy side button and use the knob to
select SINE.WFM from the file list.
4-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Self Tests
Self Tests use internal routines to confirm basic functionality and proper
adjustment. No test equipment is required to do these test procedures.
The self tests include internal diagnostics to verify that the instrument passes the
internal circuit tests, and calibration routines to check and adjust the instrument
internal calibration constants.
Diagnostics
This procedure uses internal routines to verify that the instrument is operating
correctly. No test equipment or hookups are required.
The instrument automatically performs the internal diagnostics when powered
on. You can also run the internal diagnostics using the menu selections described
in this procedure. The difference between these two methods of initiating the
diagnostics is that the menu method performs a more detailed memory check.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
Power on the instrument and allow a twentyĆminute warmĆup period
before doing this procedure.
Confirm that there is no output being performed by verifying that the RUN LED
is not on. If the LED is on, push the RUN button to turn it off.
Do the following to verify that the instrument passes the internal circuit tests:
Push UTILITY (front-panel)! Diag (bottom)! Diagnostic All (side).
The diagnostic menu is displayed and all tests are selected. Refer to
Figure 4–1. If All is not displayed, select All using the general purpose
knob.
The list displayed on the screen shows the test items and results in the calibration
and diagnostics previously performed. Select all of the test items shown on the
screen or use the general purpose knob to select a single test item that you want to
run. The results of the diagnostics are shown as error codes. Pass means that the test
results occurred without error. If an error is detected, an error code is displayed.
You can also specify how many times to perform the diagnostic tests. Push the
Cycle side button and then turn the general purpose knob to select the cycle from
1, 3, 10, 100 or Infinite. When you select Infinite, the tests are repeatedly
performed and are not be terminated until you push the Abort Diagnostic side
button.
4-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-1: Diagnostic menu
Push the Execute Diagnostic side button to execute all of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator diagnostics automatically.
NOTE. Push the Abort Diagnostic button (side menu) to stop a selected diagnos-
tic after it is completed. This button does not stop the diagnostic while it is
processing. The Abort button stops any further diagnostics from operating.
The internal diagnostics do an extensive verification of AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator functions. While this verification progresses, the screen
displays the clock icon. When finished, the resulting status appears on the
screen.
Verify that no failures are found and reported on-screen. If the diagnostics
terminates without error, Pass is displayed instead of the - - -. If a value is
displayed, meaning an error is detected, consult a qualified service technician for
further assistance.
Push any bottom or menu button (other than UTILITY) to exit the diagnostic
screen.
4-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Calibration
The instrument includes internal calibration routines that check electrical
characteristics such as offset, attenuations and filters. Perform calibration to
adjust internal calibration constants as necessary. This procedure describes how
to do the internal calibration.
Equipment
required
None
Prerequisites
Power on the instrument and allow a 20 minute warmĆup period at an
ambient temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C before doing this
procedure.
Confirm that there is no output being performed by verifying that the RUN LED
is not on. If the LED is on, push the RUN button to turn it off.
NOTE. Some calibration items may fail if you start calibration while output is
being performed.
Do the following steps to verify that the internal adjustments have passed:
1. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! Diag (bottom)! Execute Calibration
(side).
This executes the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator calibration
routines automatically.
The internal calibration does an extensive verification of proper AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator functions. While this verification progresses, the
message box displaying Executing Calibration appears on the screen. When
finished, the resulting status will appear in the message box as shown in
Figure 4–2.
4-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-2: Calibration result message box (except option 02)
Verify that no failures are found and reported in the message box. If the
calibration displays Fail as the result, consult a qualified service technician for
further assistance.
2. Push the OK side button and then any bottom or menu button (other than the
UTILITY) to exit the dialog screen.
NOTE. The calibration data in the memory may be lost if the instrument is
powered off while the calibration is executing.
4-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Performance Tests
This subsection contains a collection of procedures for checking that the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator performs as warranted.
The procedures are arranged in eight logical groupings, presented in the
following order:
Table 4-1: Performance test items
See
See
(performance
verification)
(specifications)
Titles
Test items
Operating mode tests
Page 4-16
Continuous, Triggered, and Gated mode
Page 1-4
Amplitude and offset accuracy tests (normal out) Page 4-22
Amplitude accuracy, and DC offset accuracy Page 1-5
Amplitude, DC offset and rise time accuracy
tests (direct DA out)
Page 4-27
Amplitude accuracy, DC offset accuracy and Page 1-6
Rise time accuracy
Pulse response tests (normal out)
Trigger input tests
Page 4-35
Page 4-37
Rise time accuracy
Page 1-6
Page 1-9
Trigger level accuracy, and Trigger function
normality
Event input and enhanced mode tests
Page 4-41
External event input function normality, and
Event mode normality
Page 1-11
Page 1-5
Page 1-7
1/4ĂClockĂfrequencyĂandĂ10 MHz reference input Page 4-48
tests
1/4ĂclockĂoutputĂfrequencyĂandĂ
Reference input normality accuracy
Marker output tests
Page 4-50
Marker output level accuracy
The performance tests confirms all the characteristics that are designated as
checked in Appendix A:Specifications. (The characteristic items that must be
checked are listed with the check mark (n) in Appendix A: Specifications).
NOTE. These procedures extend the confidence level provided by the basic
procedures described on page 4–3. The basic procedures should be done first,
followed by the Performance Tests, if desired.
4-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Prerequisites
The tests in this section produce an extensive, valid confirmation of performance
and functionality when the following requirements are met:
H
H
The cabinet must be installed on the instrument.
You must have performed and passed the procedures under Self Tests, found
on page 4–3.
H
The waveform generator must have been recently adjusted at an ambient
temperature between +20_ C and +30_ C, must have been operating for a
warm-up period of at least 20 minutes, and must be operating at an ambient
temperature between +10_ C and +40_ C.
Refer to Conventions on page 4–2 for more information.
Equipment Required
These procedures use external, traceable signal sources to directly check
warranted characteristics. Table 4–2 lists the equipment required to complete the
performance tests.
Table 4-2: Test equipment
Item number and
description
Minimum requirements
Example (recommended)
Purpose
1. Frequency Counter
1 MHz to 100 MHz,
Anritsu MF1603A
Checks reference input.
Accuracy: t 0.2 ppm
2. Digital multi meter
DC volts range: 0.05 V to 10 V,
Fluke 8842A
Measures voltage. Used in
multiple procedures.
Accuracy: "0.1 %
3. Oscilloscope
4. Oscilloscope
Tektronix 784D
Checks output signals. Used
in multiple procedures.
Bandwidth: u 500 MHz, 1 MW and
50 W inputs
Tektronix TDS820
Checks direct DA rise time
and normal out pulse reĆ
sponse.
Bandwidth: u 6 GHz,
Rise time: t 58.3 ps, 50 W input
5. Function Generator
Output voltage: -5 V to +5 V,
Tektronix AFG310
Generates external input
signals. Used in multiple input
signal test procedures.
Frequency accuracy: t 0.01 %
50 W, male to male SMA connectors
6. SMA Coaxial Cable
(2 required)
Tektronix part number
174Ć1427Ć00
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
7. BNC Coaxial Cable
(3 required)
50 W, male to male BNC connectors
SMA (male) to BNC (female), 50 W
SMA (female) to BNC (male), 50 W
Tektronix part number
012Ć0482Ć00
8. Adapter
(2 required)
Tektronix part number
015Ć0554Ć00
9. Adapter
Tektronix part number
015Ć0572Ć00
4-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-2: Test equipment (cont.)
Item numberand
description
Minimum requirements
Example (recommended)
Purpose
10. BNCĆTConnector
BNC (male) to BNC (female) to BNC
(female)
Tektronix part number
103Ć0030Ć00
Signal interconnection
11. DualĆBanana Connector BNC (female) to dual banana
Tektronix part number
103Ć0090Ć00
Signal interconnection
Signal termination
12. SMA Terminator
(2 required)
50 W, SMA (male)
Tektronix part number
015Ć1022Ć01
13. Precision Terminator
50 W, 0.1 %, BNC
Tektronix part number
011Ć0129Ć00
Signal termination
14. Performance check disk Must use example listed
Supplied with the product,
Tektronix part number
062ĆA273Ć00
To provide waveform files
15. Ground closure (loopĆ
back cable) with 9Ćpin,
DĆtype connector
Custom,
See Figure 4-3.
For event mode test
Dip switch
Switch ID symbols
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
STROBE
3 (Event Signal)
2 (Event Signal)
1 (Event Signal)
0 (Event Signal)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
Signal Ground (GND)
5
4
3
2
1
6
7
8
9
10
SW5
SW4
SW3
SW2
SW1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
4
3
2
1
9Ćpin, DĆtype,
male connector
9
8
7
6
Figure 4-3: EVENT IN connector pins and signals and ground closure connector
4-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Loading Files
The following steps explain how to load files from the Performance Check/Ad-
justment disk into the waveform memory and/or sequence memory.
1. Insert the disk into the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator floppy disk
drive.
2. Select SETUP (front)! Waveform/Sequence (bottom)! Load... (side)!
Drive... (side).
The Select Drive dialog box appears as shown in Figure 4–4.
Figure 4-4: Loading file; selecting storage drive
3. Select Floppy from the dialog box using the general purpose knob, and then
push the OK side button.
The Select Drive dialog box disappears and the files in the floppy disk are
listed on the Select File dialog box.
4. Use the general purpose knob to select a file to load from the dialog box, and
then push the OK side button.
The waveform or sequence you selected is loaded into the instrument, and
the instrument is also setup with the parameters stored in that file.
5. Remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive if the floppy disk is no
longer needed.
6. Push any bottom button or menu button to exit the menu.
4-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
NOTE. The floppy disk file list displayed on the screen does not automatically
update when you replace the diskette with another diskette. To update the file
list, reselect the floppy disk drive.
Performance
Check/Adjustment Files
Table 4–3 lists the sequence and waveform files on the Performance Check/Ad-
justment disk that are used in these performance tests, the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator front panel settings that each file sets up, and the perfor-
mance test that uses each file.
NOTE. The files on the Performance Check disk are locked (files are marked by
the icon
in the file list), so the data in these files cannot be changed unless
the lock is opened.
Table 4-3: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk
No. File name
EDIT menu
Form
SETUP menu
Points Clock Filter
Through 1ĂV
Marker
setup
Usage
Ampl Offset
1
MODE.WFM
1000
4 GHz
0ĂV
Marker Run mode,Trigger level,
1,2: 0 to Internal trigger accuracy
499:
High,
500 to
999: Low
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PULSE.WFM
AMP1.SEQ
AMP2.SEQ
1000
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
Pulse response
Amplitude accuracy
(Normal out), Marker
Amplitude accuracy
(Direct out)
DC_P.WFM
(AMPx.SEQ)
1000
1000
1000
1000
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
100 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
Amplitude accuracy
Amplitude accuracy
Amplitude accuracy
Offset accuracy
1
1
DC_M.WFM
(AMPx.SEQ)
DC0.WFM
(AMP2.SEQ)
OFFSET.WFM
100 MHz Through 20 mV 0ĂV
4-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Table 4-3: Waveforms and sequences in performance check disk (cont.)
No. File name
EDIT menu
Form
SETUP menu
Points Clock Filter
Through 1ĂV
Marker
setup
Usage
Ampl Offset
9
TRIG.WFM
1000
1 MHz
0ĂV
Trigger input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
Event input
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
PT_EVENT.SEQ
PT_STROB.SEQ
S1024.WFM
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
1024
400 MHz Through 1ĂV
400 MHz Through 1ĂV
400 MHz Through 1ĂV
400 MHz Through 1 V
400 MHz Through 1ĂV
400 MHz Through 1ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0ĂV
0 V
0ĂV
0ĂV
2
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
S1024H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
2
2
2
2
R1024H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
T1024H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
Q1024H.WFM
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
NULL1024H.WFM
2
(PT_xxxxx.SEQ)
1
2
The AMPx.SEQ represents AMP1.SEQ and AMP2.SEQ.
The PT_xxxxx.SEQ represents PT_EVENT.SEQ and PT_STROB.SEQ
4-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
AWG710 Test Record
Photocopy this test record and use to record the performance test results for your
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
AWG710 Test Record
Instrument Serial Number:ą
Temperature:ą
Certificate Number:ą
RH %:ą
Date of Calibration:ą
Technician:ą
AWG710 Performance Test
Operating Mode
Minimum
Incoming
Outgoing
Maximum
Check Cont Mode
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Check Triggered Mode (when the FORCE
TRIGGER button is pushed)
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Check Triggered Mode (with external triggering)
Check Gated Mode (when the FORCE TRIGGER
button is pushed)
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Check Gated Mode (with the gate signal when
the AWG trigger polarity is set to positive)
Check Gated Mode (with the gate signal when the
AWG trigger polarity is set to negative)
Amplitude and Offset Accuracy (Normal Out), (except option 02)
CH1 Amplitude
CH1 Amplitude
CH1 Offset
20 mV
200 mV
2 V
17.60 mV
194.0 mV
1.9580 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
22.40 mV
206.0 mV
2.0420 V
20 mV
200 mV
2 V
17.60 mV
194.0 mV
1.9580 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
22.40 mV
206.0 mV
2.0420 V
0 V
+0.5 V
-0.5 V
- 10.0 mV
+ 0.4825 V
- 0.4825 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
+ 10.0 mV
+ 0.5175 V
- 0.5175 V
CH1 Offset
0 V
+0.5 V
-0.5 V
- 10.0 mV
+ 0.4825 V
- 0.4825 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
+ 10.0 mV
+ 0.5175 V
- 0.5175 V
4-13
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
AWG710 Test Record (cont.)
Instrument Serial Number:ą
Temperature:ą
Certificate Number:ą
RH %:ą
Date of Calibration:ą
Technician:ą
AWG710 Performance Test
Minimum
Incoming
Outgoing
Maximum
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time (Direct DA Out)
CH1 Amplitude
20 mV
1 V
17.60 mV
0.9780 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
22.40 mV
1.0220 V
CH1 Amplitude
20 mV
1 V
17.60 mV
0.9780 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
22.40 mV
1.0220 V
CH1 Offset
0 V
0 V
- 10.0 mV
- 10.0 mV
N/A
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
+ 10.0 mV
+ 10.0 mV
280 ps
CH1 Offset
CH1 Rise Time
0.5 V Amplitude
(10 to 90% point)
CH1 Rise Time
0.5 V Amplitude
(10 to 90% point)
N/A
__________
__________
280 ps
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time (option 02: Extended bandwidth output)
CH1 Amplitude
500 mV
1 V
488.0 mV
0.9780 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
512.0 mV
1.0220 V
CH1 Amplitude
500 mV
1 V
488.0 mV
0.9780 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
512.0 mV
1.0220 V
CH1 Offset
0 V
0 V
- 10.0 mV
- 10.0 mV
N/A
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
+ 10.0 mV
+ 10.0 mV
175 ps
CH1 Offset
CH1 Rise Time
1.0 V Amplitude
(10 to 90 % point)
CH1 Rise Time
1.0 V Amplitude
(10 to 90 % point)
N/A
__________
__________
175 ps
Pulse Response (Normal Out), (except option 02: Extended bandwidth output)
CH1 Rise Time
1 V Amplitude
(10 to 90% point)
N/A
__________
__________
__________
480 ps
480 ps
CH1 Rise Time
1 V Amplitude
(10 to 90% point)
N/A
__________
Trigger Input
Positive Threshold
(set the triggering level to 5 V)
No trigger when input voltage vary
from 0 V to 4.65 V.
Trigger when input voltage vary
from 4.65 V to 5.35 V.
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
4-14
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
AWG710 TestRecord (cont.)
Instrument Serial Number:ą
Temperature:ą
Certificate Number:ą
RH %:ą
Date of Calibration:ą
Technician:ą
AWG710 Performance Test
Minimum
Incoming
Outgoing
Maximum
Negative Threshold
(set the triggering level to -5 V)
No trigger when input voltage vary
from 0 V to -4.65 V.
Trigger when input voltage vary
from -5.35 V to -4.65 V.
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Event Input and Enhanced Mode
Check Event Input with Strobe Off
pin 0 (when SW1 of the ground closure is closed ) Pass/Fail
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
pin 1 (when SW2 of the ground closure is closed)
pin 2 (when SW3 of the ground closure is closed)
pin 3 (when SW4 of the ground closure is closed)
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Pass/Fail
Check Strobe Input
(when SW5 of the ground closure is on and off)
Pass/Fail
__________
__________
Pass/Fail
1/4 Clock Frequency and 10 MHz Reference Input
Check 1/4 Clock Out Frequency
Internal Clock = 200 MS/s
49 999 950 Hz
49 990 000 Hz
50 490 000 Hz
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
50 000 050 Hz
50 010 000 Hz
50 510 000 Hz
Check output with 10 MHz Reference Input
10 MHz Ref In = 10 MHz
Check output with 10.1 MHz Reference Input
10 MHz Ref In = 10.1 MHz
Marker Output
MARKER1 Low level (Set the level to -1.1 V.)
MARKER1 High level (Set the level to 3.0 V.)
MARKER1 Low level (Set the level to -1.1 V.)
MARKER1 High level (Set the level to 3.0 V.)
MARKER2 Low level (Set the level to -1.1 V.)
MARKER2 High level (Set the level to 3.0 V.)
MARKER2 Low level (Set the level to -1.1 V.)
MARKER2 High level (Set the level to 3.0 V.)
-1.2550 V
2.750 V
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
__________
-0.9450 V
3.250 V
-1.2550 V
2.750 V
-0.9450 V
3.250 V
-1.2550 V
2.750 V
-0.9450 V
3.250 V
-1.2550 V
2.750 V
-0.9450 V
3.250 V
4-15
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Operating Mode Tests
The following procedures verify the operation of the Cont, Triggered and Gated
modes.
NOTE. When you output signals from the CH1 or CH1 OUTPUT, check that
the other OUTPUT ( CH1 or CH1 ) LED is off. If the other OUT-
PUT LED is on, push the CH1 or CH1 OUT button to turn off the output.
Check Cont Mode
Equipment
required
A 50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable,ĂaĂSMA (female)ĆBNC (male)Ăadapter, and
an oscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listedon page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W SMA coaxial cable to connect the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator CH1 output connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input connector
(see Figure 4–5).
OscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D)
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
SMA(Female)ĆBNC
(Male) adapter
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-5: Cont mode initial test hookup
2. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 ns/div
Trigger
4-16
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
Do the following steps to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
controls and to select the waveform file:
1. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
2. Load the MODE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
3. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connectors are on.
4. Check that the amplitude of the sine wave displayed on the oscilloscope is
five vertical divisions and that a waveform of approximately one cycle per
2.5 horizontal divisions is displayed.
Check Triggered Mode
The following table lists the equipment and prerequisites required to check the
Triggered mode.
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cables, aĂ50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable,
aĂSMA(Fe)ĆBNC(Ma)Ăadapter,ĂaĂBNCĆTĂ(male to 2 females) adapter , a
function generator, and an oscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50ĂW BNC coaxial cable and a BNC-T adapter to connect the function
generator output connector to the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
TRIG IN connector. Refer to Figure 4–6.
2. Connect a second 50ĂW BNC coaxial cable to the BNC-T adapter. Connect
the opposite end of the coaxial cable to the oscilloscope CH2 input.
3. Use a 50 W SMA coaxial cable and SMA (female)-BNC (male) adapter to
connect the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output connector
to the oscilloscope CH1 input connector.
4-17
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator rear panel
OscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D)
Function Generator (AFG310)
Output
CH1 output
BNC T
Adapter
CH1 input
CH2 input
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
SMA (Female)ĆBNC
(Male) adapter
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-6: Triggered mode initial test hookup
4. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 a nd CH2
CH1 and CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500mV/div
CH2 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
5. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V into 50 W (4.0 V into 1 MW)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V into 50 W (2.0 V into 1 MW)
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
4-18
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
6. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and to select the waveform file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Triggered (side)
c. Load the MODE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
d. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connectors are on.
e. Push the FORCE TRIGGER button.
Verify that the oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave when the FORCE
TRIGGER button is pushed. You may need to adjust the horizontal position
control to see the signal.
7. Follow the substeps below to check the triggered mode with external
triggering:
a. Turn on the function generator output.
b. Verify that the oscilloscope displays a one-cycle sine wave for each
trigger supplied by the function generator. See Figure 4–7.
Retain the test hookup.
Waveform
CH1
output
Trigger
CH2
signal
Figure 4-7: Relationship between trigger signal and waveform output
4-19
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Check Gated Mode
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cables, aĂ50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable, ĂaĂSMA
(female)ĆBNC (male)Ăadapter,Ăa ĂBNCĆTĂ(male to 2 females) adapter, a
function generator, and an oscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
1. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 a nd CH2
CH1 and CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500mV/div
CH2 sca le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 MW
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORMAL
2. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 kHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V into 50 W (4.0 V into 1 MW)
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 V into 50 W (2.0 V into 1 MW)
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
3. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and to select the waveform file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Gated (side).
c. Load the MODE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
d. Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front-panel)! Clock (side).
4-20
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
e. Push 1, 0, 0 and M (SHIFT+7) keys in this order or turn the general
purpose knob to set the internal clock frequency to 100 MHz.
f. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
g. Push the FORCE TRIGGER button.
Verify that the oscilloscope displays sine waves while the FORCE TRIG-
GER button is pushed and that the output stops when the Force Trigger
button is released.
4. Follow the substeps below to check the gated mode with the gate signal:
a. Set the oscilloscope trigger source to CH2 and change the trigger level to
1 V.
b. Turn on the function generator output.
c. Verify that the oscilloscope displays sine waves while the function
generator gate signal amplitude is High level. See Figure 4–8.
Waveform
output
CH1
Gate
CH2
signal
Figure 4-8: Relationship between gate signal and waveform output
d. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Trigger (bottom)! Negative (side).
This changes the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator trigger polarity to
negative.
5. Verify that the oscilloscope displays sine waves while the function generator
gate signal amplitude is Low level.
6. Turn off the function generator output and disconnect from the oscilloscope.
4-21
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Amplitude and Offset Accuracy Tests (Normal Out), (except option 02)
These procedures check the accuracy of the amplitude and offset outputs of the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
NOTE. The amplitude and offset accuracy checks are structured as a continuous
test. The next test uses the control settings from the previous test and uses the
next step in the sequence file.
NOTE. When you output signal from the CH1 or CH1 OUTPUT, check that the
other OUTPUT ( CH1 or CH1 ) LED is off.
If the other OUTPUT LED is on, push the CH1 or CH1 OUT button to turn off
the output.
Check Amplitude
Accuracy
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxialcabel , a 50Ă WĂprecision terminator, aĂSMA
(male)ĆBNC (female)Ăadapters, BNC (female)ĆtoĆdual banana adapter,
and a digitalmutlimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable, a SMA(Ma)-BNC(Fe) adapter, a 50 W
precision terminator, and a BNC-to-dual banana adapter to connect the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output to the DMM input
connector (see Figure 4–9).
4-22
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
InputĂconnector
+ĂBNCĆtoĆdualbanana adapter
+Ă50 W BNCĂcoaxialĂcable
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
DMM
50 W BNCĂcoaxialcabel
CH1ĂoutputĂconnector
+ĂSMA(Ma)ĆBNC(Fe) adapter
+ĂBNC 50 WĂprecision terminator
+Ă50 WĂBNC coaxialcabel
Figure 4-9: Amplitude accuracy initial test hookup
2. Set the DMM controls as follows:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
3. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and to select the sequence file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to enhanced mode.
c. Load the AMP1.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
4. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
5. Do the following substeps to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator amplitude and confirm the offset setting:
a. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Amplitude (side).
4-23
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Push 0, ., 0, 2 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.020 V.
c. Verify that the offset setting display on the Offset side button is 0.000 V.
If the offset display is not set correctly, push the Offset side button, push 0
and then the ENTER key.
6. Do the following substeps to check the amplitude accuracy of a 20 mV
amplitude setting:
a. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
b. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
c. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
d. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
20 mV ± 2.4 mV.
e. Push 0, ., 2 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.200 V.
7. Do the following to check the amplitude accuracy of 200 mV amplitude
setting:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
b. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
c. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
d. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
e. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
200 mV ± 6 mV.
f. Push the 2 and the ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 2 V.
8. Do the following substeps to check the amplitude accuracy of 2 V amplitude
setting:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
b. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
c. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
d. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
e. Check that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
2 V ± 0.042 V.
4-24
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
9. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
b. Disconnect the adapter, terminator, and cable from the CH1 output con-
nector.
c. Connect the adapter, terminator, and cable (removed in step b)
to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
10. Repeat the Check Amplitude Accuracy procedure for the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1 beginning on page 4–22.
11. Reconnect the test hookup on the CH1 output to the CH1 output.
Retain the control settings.
Check Offset Accuracy
The following procedure checks the Offset Accuracy:
1. Use the test hookup and settings from the Accuracy Test on page 4–22.
2. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and to select the sequence file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Load the OFFSET.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
c. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Amplitude (side).
d. Push 0, ., 0, 2 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.020 V.
3. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
4. Do the following substeps to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
offset:
a. Push the Offset side button.
b. Push 0 and ENTER keys in this order.
c. Verify that the reading on the DMM falls within 0 V ± 10 mV.
d. Push 0, . , 5 and ENTER keys in this order to change the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator offset to 0.5 V.
4-25
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
e. Verify that the reading on the DMM falls within 0.5 V ± 0.0175 V.
f. Push -, 0, . , 5 and ENTER keys in this order to change the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator offset to -0.5 V.
g. Check that the reading on the DMM falls within -0.5 V ± 0.0175 V.
5. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
b. Disconnect the adapter, terminator and cable from the CH1 output con-
nector.
c. Connect the adapter, terminator, and cable (removed in step b)
to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
6. Repeat the Check Offset Accuracy procedure for the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1.
7. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
8. Disconnect the test hookup from the CH1 output connector.
4-26
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time Tests (Direct DA Out), (except option 02)
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator direct waveform outputs; amplitude and offset.
Check Amplitude
and
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cable, a 50ĂWĂprecision terminator, an SMA
(male)ĆBNC (female)Ăadapter, BNC (female)ĆtoĆdual banana adapter,
and a digital multimeter (DMM).
DC Offset
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable, an SMA(Ma)-BNC(Fe) adapter, a 50 W
precision terminator, and a BNC-to-dual banana adapter to connect the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output to the DMM input
connector (see Figure 4–10).
InputĂconnector
+ĂBNCĆtoĆdual banana adapter
+Ă50 W BNCĂcoaxialĂcable
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
DMM
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
CH1ĂoutputĂconnector
+ĂSMA(Male)ĆBNC(Female) adapter
+ĂBNC 50 WĂprecision terminator
+Ă50 WĂBNC coaxial cable
Figure 4-10: Direct DA output amplitude accuracy initial test hookup
2. Set the DMM controls as follows:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
3. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
4-27
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
4. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to enhanced mode.
5. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Output (side)! Direct (side).
6. Load the AMP2.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
7. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
8. Do the following substeps to check the direct DA amplitude accuracy of
a 1 V amplitude setting:
a. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
b. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
c. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
d. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
1.0 V ± 0.022 V.
e. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Amplitude (side).
f. Push 0, .,0, 2 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.020 V.
9. Do the following to check the direct DA amplitude accuracy of 20 mV
amplitude setting:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
b. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
c. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
d. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
e. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
20 mV ± 2.4 mV.
10. Follow the substeps below to check the DC offset:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
b. Check that the reading from the oscilloscope display is about
0 V ±10 mV.
11. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
4-28
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Disconnect the adapter, terminator and cable from the CH1 output con-
nector.
c. Connect the adapter, terminator, and cable (removed in step
b) to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
12. Repeat step 8 through step 10 for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator CH1.
13. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
14. Push the RUN button to turn off the RUN LED.
15. Disconnect the DMM.
Check Pulse Rise Time
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope (TDS820).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use the 50 W SMA coaxial cable to connect the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1 output connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input
connector (see Figure 4–11).
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope (TDS820)
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-11: Direct DA output pulse rise time initial test hookup
2. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC if applicable
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mV/div
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ps/div
4-29
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
NOTE. The pulse rise time tests use the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
control settings that have been used in the amplitude and DC offset tests. Do not
initialize the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator controls.
3. Load the PULSE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
4. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Continuous (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to the Continuous mode.
5. Change the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator controls as follows:
a. Push VERTICAL MENU (bottom)! Amplitude (side).
b. Push 0, ., 5 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.5 V.
c. Verify that the Direct DA out is set. If not, push Output (side)! Direct
(side).
6. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connectors are on.
7. Verify that the rise time of the pulse waveform displayed on the oscilloscope
is equal to or less than 280 ps.
8. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
b. Disconnect the cable from the CH1 output connector.
c. Connect the cable to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
9. Repeat step 7 to verify the rise time for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator CH1.
10. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
4-30
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Amplitude, Offset Accuracy and Rise Time Tests (for option 02)
These procedures check the accuracy of the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator option 02 outputs; amplitude and offset.
Check Amplitude
and
DC Offset
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cable, a 50ĂWĂprecision terminator, an
SMA(Ma)ĆBNC(Fe)Ăadapter, BNC (female)ĆtoĆdual banana adapter, and
a digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 option 02 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable, an SMA(Ma)-BNC(Fe) adapter, a 50 W
precision terminator, and a BNC-to-dual banana adapter to connect the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output to the DMM input
connector (see Figure 4–12).
InputĂconnector
+ĂBNCĆtoĆdual banana adapter
+Ă50 W BNCĂcoaxialĂcable
AWG710 option 02 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
DMM
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
CH1ĂoutputĂconnector
+ĂSMA(Male)ĆBNC(Female) adapter
+ĂBNC 50 WĂprecision terminator
+Ă50 WĂBNC coaxial cable
Figure 4-12: Option02 output amplitude accuracy initial test hookup
2. Set the DMM controls as follows:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
4-31
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
3. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
4. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to enhanced mode.
5. Load the AMP2.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
6. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
7. Do the following substeps to check the option 02 amplitude accuracy of 1 V
amplitude setting:
a. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
b. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
c. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
d. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
1.0 V ± 0.022 V.
e. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Amplitude (side).
f. Push 0, . , 5 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 0.500 V.
8. Do the following to check the option 02 amplitude accuracy of 500 mV
amplitude setting:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button twice.
b. Write the DMM reading as a positive voltage.
c. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
d. Write the DMM reading as a negative voltage.
e. Verify that the positive minus negative voltages fall within
500 mV ± 12 mV.
9. Follow the substeps below to check the DC offset:
a. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
b. Verify that the reading on the DMM falls within 0 V ±10 mV.
10. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
4-32
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Disconnect the adapter, terminator and cable from the CH1 output con-
nector.
c. Connect the adapter, terminator, and cable (removed in step
b) to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
e. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
11. Repeat steps 7 through step 9 for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator CH1.
12. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
13. Push the RUN button to turn off the RUN LED.
14. Disconnect the DMM.
Check Pulse Rise Time
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope (TDS820).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use the 50 W SMA coaxial cable to connect the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1 output connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input
connector (see Figure 4–13).
AWG710 option 02 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope (TDS820)
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-13: Option 02 output pulse rise time initial test hookup
2. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Verti cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC i fapplicable
4-33
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ps/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
NOTE. The pulse rise time tests use the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
s control settings that have been used in the amplitude and DC offset tests. Do
not initialize the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator controls.
3. Load the PULSE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
4. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Continuous (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to the Continuous mode.
5. Change the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator controls as follows:
a. Push VERTICAL MENU (bottom)! Amplitude (side).
b. Push 1 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the amplitude to 1 V.
6. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connectors are on.
7. Verify that the rise time of the pulse waveform displayed on the oscilloscope
is equal to or less than 175 ps.
8. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
b. Disconnect the cable from the CH1 output connector.
c. Connect the cable to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
9. Repeat step 7 to verify the rise time for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator CH1.
10. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
4-34
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Pulse Response Tests (Normal Out), (except option 02)
This procedure checks the pulse response characteristics of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator output waveforms at amplitudes of 1 V.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable and an oscilloscope (TDS820).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use the 50 W SMA coaxial cable to connect the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1 output connector to the oscilloscope CH1 input
connector (see Figure 4–14).
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope (TDS820)
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-14: Pulse response initial test hookup
2. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC if applicable
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 mV/div
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ps/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
3. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset (side)
! OK (side).
4-35
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
4. Load the PULSE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
5. Push the RUN and CH1 output buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
6. Verify the pulse response at 1 V amplitude.
a. Verify that the rise time of the waveform displayed on the oscilloscope
from 10% to 90% point is equal to or less than 480 ps.
7. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the CH1:
a. Push the CH1 output button.
b. Disconnect the cable from the CH1 output connector.
c. Connect the cable to the CH1 output connector.
d. Push the CH1 output button to turn on the CH1 LED.
8. Repeat the Check Pulse Response procedure for the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator CH1.
9. Push the CH1 output button to turn off the CH1 LED.
10. Disconnect the oscilloscope.
4-36
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger Input Tests
These procedures check the trigger level accuracy of the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator.
Equipment
required
Two 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cables, aĂ50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable, ĂaĂSMA
(female)ĆBNC (male)Ăadapter,ĂaĂBNCĆTĂ(male to 2 females) adapter, a
function generator, and an oscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W SMA coaxial cable and an SMA(Fe)-BNC(Fe) adapter to
connect the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output connector
to the oscilloscope CH1 input connector.
2. Use a BNC coaxial cable to connect the function generator to the BNC-T
adapter which goes to the Trigger Input on the AWG710. Connect a
50ăW BNC coaxial cable to the BNC-T adapter. Connect the opposite end of
the BNC cable to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope. Refer tp Figure 4–15.
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
OscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D)
Generator rear panel
Function Generator (AFG310)
Output
CH1 output
CH1 input
CH2 input
BNC T
Adapter
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
SMA(Female)ĆBNC
(Male) adapter
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-15: Trigger input initial test hookup
3. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertic al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1 and CH2
CH1 and CH2 coupling . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500mV/div
CH2 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2V/div
4-37
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
CH2 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 1 M W
Horizontal
Sweep. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
a. Set the function generator controls as follows:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off
b. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
c. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Gated (side).
d. Load the TRIG.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
4. Push the RUN and CH1 OUT buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
5. Set the trigger level to 5 V by the following substeps:
a. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Trigger (bottom)! Level (side).
b. Push 5 and ENTER keys in this order.
6. Set the trigger input signal level to 4.65 V by the following substeps below:
a. Turn on the function generator output.
b. Select offset by pressing the OFFSET button of the function generator.
c. Set the DC waveform High level to 4.65 V by using the arrow keys.
d. Check that no waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in
Figure 4–16.
4-38
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger
signal
CH2
CH1
Waveform
output
Figure 4-16: Trigger signal and waveform output (+5 V check 1)
e. Change the pulse waveform high level to 5.35 V by using the arrow
keys.
f. Check that the sine waves are displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in
Figure 4–17.
Trigger
CH2
signal
Waveform
output
CH1
Figure 4-17: Trigger signal and waveform output (+5 V check 2)
7. Follow the substeps below to check the trigger level accuracy at -5 V:
a. Push -, 5 and ENTER keys in this order.
b. Set the DC waveform low level of the function generator to -5.35 V by
using the arrow keys.
4-39
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
c. Check that no waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in
Figure 4–18.
Waveform
output
CH1
Trigger
signal
CH2
Figure 4-18: Trigger signal and waveform output (-5 V check 1)
d. Change the pulse waveform low level of function generator to -4.65 V
by using cursor keys.
e. Check that sine waves are displayed on the oscilloscope as shown in
Figure 4–19.
Waveform
output
CH1
Trigger
signal
CH2
Figure 4-19: Trigger signal and waveform output (-5 V check 2)
8. Push the RUN button and the CH1 button to turn off the RUN LED.
9. Turn off the function generator output to disconnect the function generator.
4-40
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Event Input and Enhanced Mode Tests
These procedures check the event input signals and enhanced mode operation.
NOTE. The event input check with strobe off and the strobe input check are
structured as a continuous test. After the Check Event Input with Strobe Off test
is complete, the Check Strobe Input test uses the connections and oscilloscope
settings from the Check Event Input with Strobe Off test.
Check Event Input with
Strobe Off
Equipment
required
AĂ50ĂW SMAĂcoaxial cable,ĂaĂSMA (female)ĆBNC (male)Ăadapter and
oscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D), and customĆmade ground closure. See Figure
4-3 for the connections.
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment controls:
1. Use a 50 W SMA coaxial cable and a SMA(Fe)-BNC(Fe) adapter to connect
the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator CH1 output connector to the
oscilloscope CH1 input connector (see Figure 4–20).
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
OscilloscopeĂ(TDS784D)
SMA(Female)ĆBNC
(Male) adapter
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-20: Event input and enhanced mode initial test hookup
2. Connect the ground closure to the EVENT IN connector on the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator rear panel.
3. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertic al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200mV/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns/div or 400 ns/div
4-41
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +100 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
4. Set all the switches of the ground closure to open.
5. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and select the sequence file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Load the PT_EVENT.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
c. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side) to
set the enhanced mode.
6. Push the RUN and CH1 OUT buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
7. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 0 input:
a. Verify that a waveform displayed on the oscilloscope has the same
amplitude as shown in Figure 4–21.
Figure 4-21: Waveform while all ground disclosure switches are open
b. Close the SW1 of the ground closure to generate an event signal on the
EVENT IN connector pin 0.
4-42
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
c. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform as shown in
Figure 4–22 and that the waveform amplitude is the half size of
Figure 4–21.
Figure 4-22: Waveform output when the SW1 is closed
d. Open SW1 of the ground closure to degenerate the event signal.
e. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform in Figure 4–21.
8. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 1 input:
a. Close SW2 of the ground closure to generate an event signal on the
EVENT IN connector pin 1.
b. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform as shown in Fig-
ure 4–23.
Figure 4-23: Waveform output when SW2 is closed
4-43
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
c. Open the SW2 of the ground closure to degenerate the event signal.
d. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform shown in Figure 4–21.
9. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 2 input:
a. Close SW3 of the ground closure to generate an event signal on the
EVENT IN connector pin 2.
b. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform shown in
Figure 4–24.
Figure 4-24: Waveform output when the SW3 is closed
c. Open SW3 of the ground closure to degenerate the event signal.
d. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform in Figure 4–21.
10. Check the EVENT IN connector pin 3 input:
a. Close the SW4 of the ground closure to generate an event signal on the
EVENT IN connector pin 3.
b. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform shown in
Figure 4–25.
4-44
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-25: Waveform output when SW4 is closed
c. Open SW4 of the ground closure to degenerate the event signal.
d. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform in Figure 4–21.
11. Retain the test hookup and control settings.
Check Strobe Input
Use the test hookup and oscilloscope settings from the Check Event Input with
Strobe Off test.
1. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and select the sequence file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Load the PT_STROB.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
c. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side) to
set the run mode to enhanced.
2. Push the RUN and CH1 OUT buttons.
The LEDs above the RUN button and CH1 output connector are on.
3. Check the EVENT IN connector strobe pin input:
a. Verify that the waveform displayed on the oscilloscope has the same
amplitude as shown in Figure 4–26.
4-45
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Figure 4-26: Initial waveform output
b. Close SW5 of the ground closure to generate an event signal on the
EVENT IN connector strobe pin.
c. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the DC waveform as shown in
Figure 4–27.
Figure 4-27: DC waveform output when the SW5 is closed
d. Open SW5 of the ground closure to degenerate the strobe signal on the
EVENT IN connector strobe pin.
e. Verify that the DC waveform is displayed on the oscilloscope.
f. Close SW5 of the ground closure again.
4-46
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
g. Verify that the oscilloscope displays the waveform as shown in
Figure 4–26.
4. Push the CH1 OUT button to turn off the CH1 LED.
5. Disconnect the oscilloscope and ground closure.
4-47
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
1/4 Clock FrequencyĂandĂ10 MHz Reference Input Tests
These procedures check the 10 MHz reference input function of the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator .
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW SMA coaxial cable, A 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cable, aĂSMA(feĆ
male)ĆBNC(male)Ăadapter,Ăa frequency counter, and a function
generator.
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listed on page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W SMA coaxial cable and SMA (Fe)-BNC (Ma) adapter to connect
the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator 1/4 CLOCK OUT connector to
the input A connector on the frequency counter.
2. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to connect the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator 10 MHz REF IN connector to the function generator output
connector (see Figure 4–28).
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator rear panel
Frequency Counter
Function Generator (AFG310)
10ĂMHzĂREFĂIN
1/4ĂCLOCKĂOUT
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
SMA(Female)ĆBNC
(Male) adapter
50 W SMAĂcoaxial cable
Figure 4-28: 1/4 Clock frequency and 10 MHz reference input initial test hookup
a. Set the frequency counter controls as follows:
INPUT A
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A FREQ
Gate time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 s
Trigger Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
4-48
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
b. Set the function generator (AFG310) controls:
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous
Parameters
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MHz
Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.0 V into 50 W (4.0 V into 1 MW)
Offs et . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On
CheckĂ1/4ĂClock
frequency
1. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and select the waveform file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Load the MODE.WFM file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
c. Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front-panel)! Clock (side).
d. Push 2, 0, 0 and M (SHIFT+7) keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the internal clock frequency to 200 MHz.
2. Push the RUN button.
The LED above the RUN button is on.
3. Verify that the frequency counter reading is 50 MHz ± 50 Hz (using the
internal reference clock).
4. Retain the test hookup.
CheckĂ10MHzĂReference
InputĂ
1. Push HORIZONTAL MENU (front-panel)! Clock Ref (side) so that the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator reference clock is set to External.
2. Verify that the frequency counter reading is 50.0 MHz ±10 kHz (using the
external reference clock).
3. Change the function generator controls as follows:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 MHz
4. Check that the frequency counter reading is 50.5 MHz ±10 kHz.
5. Turn the function generator output off and disconnect the function generator
and frequency counter.
4-49
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
Marker Output Tests
The following procedures check the accuracy of the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator marker output level.
NOTE. Connect a 50 W SMA terminator to the inverted marker output connector
during the marker output tests.
Equipment
required
A 50ĂW BNCĂcoaxial cable, a 50ĂWĂprecision terminator, aĂSMA
(male)ĆBNC (female)Ăadapters, BNC (female)ĆtoĆdual banana adapter,
anda digital multimeter (DMM).
Prerequisites
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator must meet the
prerequisites listedon page 4-8.
Do the following steps to install the test hookup and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable, a SMA(Ma)-BNC(Fe) adapter, a 50 W
precision terminator, and a BNC-to-dual banana adapter to connect the
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator MARKER 1 OUT to the DMM
input connector (see Figure 4–29).
InputĂconnector
+ĂBNCĆtoĆdual banana adapter
+Ă50 W BNCĂcoaxialĂcable
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
DMM
50 W BNCĂcoaxial cable
MARKER 1ĂoutĂconnector
+ĂSMA(Male)ĆBNC(Female) adapter
+ĂBNC 50 WĂprecision terminator
+Ă50 WĂBNC coaxial cable
Figure 4-29: Marker output initial test hookup
4-50
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
2. Set the DMM controls as follows:
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VDC
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front
3. Follow the substeps below to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator controls and to select the sequence file:
a. Push UTILITY (front-panel)! System (bottom)! Factory Reset
(side)! OK (side).
b. Push SETUP (front-panel)! Run Mode (bottom)! Enhanced (side).
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator is set to enhanced mode.
c. Load the AMP1.SEQ file.
Refer to Loading Files on page 4–10 for file loading procedures.
4. Push the RUN button.
The LEDs above the RUN button is on.
5. Do the following substeps to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator marker output high level setting:
a. Push VERTICAL MENU (front-panel)! Marker... (side)! Marker 1
High Level (side).
b. Push 3, ., 0 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the marker level to 3.0 V.
c. Verify that the marker 1 high level reading on the DMM screen falls
within 2.75 V through 3.25 V.
d. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
6. Do the following substeps to set the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator marker output low level setting:
a. Push Marker 1 Low Level side button.
b. Push –, 1, ., 1 and ENTER keys in this order or turn the general pur-
pose knob to set the marker level to –1.1 V.
c. Verify that the marker 1 Low level reading on the DMM screen falls
within –1.255 V through –0.945 V.
d. Push the FORCE EVENT button.
4-51
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performance Verification
7. Do the following substeps to change the connection to check the MARKER1:
a. Disconnect the 50 W precision terminator from the MARKER1 OUT con-
nector.
b. Disconnect the cable with SMA (male)–BNC (female) adapter and BNC
50 W terminator) from MARKER 1 OUT connector.
c. Connect the 50 W precision terminator to the MARKER 1 OUT (removed
in step a).
d. Connect the adapter, terminator, and cable (removed in step b)
to the MARKER1 OUT connector.
8. Press FORCE EVENT where needed.
9. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
MARKER1 OUT.
10. Repeat step 5 through 8 for MARKER 2 OUT and MARKER2 OUT.
11. Disconnect the DMM.
4-52
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
This section provides the procedures necessary to manually adjust the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
Overview
Description
This subsection contains the following topics:
H
H
Overview. Basic information about adjustment requirements
Before Adjustments. General information about adjusting the waveform
generator and the Performance Check/Adjustment disk files.
H
Adjustment Instructions. Procedures for manually adjusting the waveform
generator.
Purpose
Use the Adjustment Instructions subsection to return the waveform generator to
conformance with the performance specified in the Specifications section. This
procedure is not required to verify the performance of the waveform generator.
To verify the performance of the instrument, refer to the Performance Verifica-
tion section.
Adjustment Interval
Perform the adjustment procedures every 12 months.
Adjustment After Repair
After the removal and replacement of a module due to electrical failure, perform
the adjustment procedures listed in Table 5–1.
Table 5-1: Adjustments required
Removed and replaced module
Adjustments required
A50 AWG board and Flash disk
Clock Ref. DAC, Calibration and
Marker level, Magic Freq.
A71 Output board
A77 Attenuator board
Other modules
Calibration
Calibration
Noneed toadjust
Adjustments
There are three adjustment procedures listed in Table 5–2. You can do Calibra-
tion and Marker level adjustments without removing the cabinet.
5-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Table 5-2: Adjustments
Adjustments
Refer to
Calibration
Page 4-3
Page 5-6
Page 5-7
Page 5-10
Reference Clock Frequency
Marker level
Magic Frequency
Before doing the adjustments, note the following requirements.
Personnel
This procedure is only to be performed by trained service technicians.
WarmĆUp Period
Self Calibration
This waveform generator requires a 20 minute warm-up time in a 20_ C to
30_ C environment before it is adjusted. Any adjustments done before the
operating temperature has stabilized may cause performance errors.
Calibrate the waveform generator using the self calibration routine. Refer to the
Performance Verification section for instructions.
Performance
These adjustment procedures require you to load a file from the Performance
Check/Adjustment disk supplied with the waveform generator. Refer to
Adjustment Instructions in this subsection for information about this file.
Check/Adjustments Files
Test Equipment
Table 5–3 lists all test equipment required to adjust the waveform generator.
5-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
EquipmentRequired
Table 5–3 lists the test equipment required to adjust the waveform generator.
Table 5-3: Testequipment
Item description
Minimum requirements
Example
Purpose
1. Oscilloscope
Bandwidth > 500 MHz
Tektronix TDS784D
Anritsu MF1603A
Output signal adjustments
Output signal adjustment
2. Frequency counter
1 MHz to 10 MHz
Accuracy < 0.2 ppm
3. BNC cable
Impedance 50 W
Tektronix part number
012Ć0482Ć00
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
Signal interconnection
Signal termination
4. SMA cable
Impedance 50 W
Tektronix part number
012Ć1565Ć00 or equivalent
5. Adapter
SMA (Fe) to BNC (Ma), 50 W
50 W, SMA male
Tektronix part number
015Ć0572Ć00
6. SMA Terminator
7. Adjustment Tool
8. Performance check disk
Tektronix part number
015Ć1022Ć01
Less than 1/8 inch diameter and
over 4 inches long
Enabling service mode
Used to provide waveform files
Must use example listed
Tektronix part number
063ĆA273Ć00
Before Adjustments
Use the following instructions to prepare the waveform generator for adjustment,
load the adjustment file required for these procedures, and make adjustments.
Cooling
When you do the adjustment procedure with the rear cover and cabinet removed,
orient the waveform generator so the bottom is down on the work surface to cool
the waveform generator properly.
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the waveform generator when the cabinet and
rear cover are removed, always make sure that the work surface is completely
clear beneath the waveform generator.
5-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Enabling Service Mode
All the adjustment procedures are obtained through the Service menu which is a
submenu of the Utility menu. To enter this menu, you must enable the Service
mode using the switch on the A10 Connector board. Perform the following step:
Power on the waveform generator by pushing ON/STBY button while
pressing the service switch on the A10 Connector board. See Figure 5–1.
If you perform the adjustment procedure without removing the cabinet, you must
insert the adjustment tool (Table 5–4, Item 7) in the hole on the left side of the
waveform generator to engage the service switch.
Toggle the ON/STBY button to STBY to disable the Service mode.
A10 Connector board
Service switch
Adjustment tool
Figure 5-1: Accessing the service switch
5-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Performance
Table 5–4 lists the waveform file, provided on the Performance Check/Adjust-
ment disk, that is required to do the adjustments.
Check/Adjustment Files
For instructions on loading files, see Operating Basics:Loading Files and the
Reference:Waveform Sequence Menu section of the User Manual. After loading
the files, push the floppy disk drive eject button and remove the floppy disk.
Table 5-4: File list for performance Check/adjustment disk
No. File name
MODE.WFM
Wfm shape
Wfm Point Clock
1000 4.0 GHz
Usage
1
Clock frequency adjustĆ
ment, and Marker Level
adjustment
5-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Adjustment Instructions
Reference Clock
Frequency
This procedure adjusts Y5200 on the A50 AWG board to set the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator clock frequency.
Equipment
Required
One frequency counter (Item 2)
One 50 W coaxial cable (Item 3)
Do the following steps to connect the test equipment and set the test equipment
controls:
1. Use a 50 W BNC coaxial cable to connect the waveform generator 10 MHz
REF OUT connector to the input A connector on the frequency counter.
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Frequency counter
10 MHz REF OUT
Input
50 W BNC coaxial cable
Figure 5-2: Hookup for the reference clock frequency adjustment
2. Set the frequency counter controls as follows:
Input A Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Frequency
Gate Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 s
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
3. Set the waveform generator controls as follows:
Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory Reset Ý OK.
4. Follow the substeps below to load the waveform:
a. Press Service Ý Tweak AWG2 (pop-up) Ý OK.
b. Press Clock Ref. DAC
5. Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the oscillator so that the frequency
counter reading is in the range of 10.0 MHz ±2 Hz (0.2 ppm).
6. Press Save to save the setting.
7. Disconnect the frequency counter.
5-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Marker Level
This procedure uses the general purpose knob on the front panel to set the
Marker Output level.
Equipment
Required
One oscilloscope (Item 1)
One SMA 50 W coaxial cable (Item 4)
SMA (female) to BNC (male) 50 W adapter (Item 5)
50 W SMA Terminator (Item 6)
Do the following steps to connect the test equipment and set test equipment
controls:
1. Use a SMA coaxial cable and a SMA (female) to BNC (male) adapter to
connect the waveform generator MARKER 1 Output connector to the CH1
input connector on the oscilloscope.
2. Connect a 50 W SMA terminator to the waveform generator MARKER 1
Output connector.
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope (TDS784D)
MARKER 1 output
MARKER 1 output
50 W SMA Terminator
SMA 50 W coaxial cable
CH1 input
SMA(Fe)ĆBNC(Ma)
adapter
Figure 5-3: Hookup for the marker level adjustment
a. Set the oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
CH1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH1 scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 mV/div
CH1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ms/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +500 mV
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
5-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
3. Do the following to set the waveform generator controls:
Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory Reset Ý OK.
4. Follow the substeps below to load the waveform:
a. Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
b. Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files and
highlight the file MODE.WFM.
Press OK to select and load the file.
c. Press the RUN button.
5. Follow the substeps below to setup the Marker:
a. Press Horizontal Ý Clock.
b. Turn the general purpose knob to set the Clock to 100 MS/s.
c. Press Vertical Ý Marker... Ý Marker 1 High Level
d. Turn the general purpose knob to set the voltage to 1.50 V.
e. Press Marker 2 High Level.
f. Turn the general purpose knob to set the voltage to 1.50 V.
g. Check that the Marker 1 low Level and the Marker 2 Low Level are
0.00 V. If there are not, set the voltage to 0.00 V in the same way.
6. Follow the substeps below to adjust Marker 1 level:
a. Press UTILITY Ý Service
b. Turn the general purpose knob to select Tweak AWG 2.
c. Press OK.
d. Press Marker 1 Adj. Level.
e. Set the oscilloscope CH1 input to GND. Note the ground position. Then
return the CH1 input to 50 W DC.
f. Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the waveform of marker low
level voltage to 0.00 V within"50 mV on the oscilloscope display.
7. Disconnect the SMA coaxial cable from the waveform generator
MARKER 1 Output, then reconnect it to the MARKER 2 Output connector.
8. Remove the 50 W SMA Terminator from the waveform generator
MARKER 1 Output, then reconnect it to the MARKER 2 Output connector.
5-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
9. Follow the substeps below to adjust the Marker 2 level:
a. Press Marker 2 Adj. Level
b. Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the waveform of marker low
level voltage to 0.00 V within"50 mV on the oscilloscope display.
10. Press Save to save the setting.
11. Disconnect the oscilloscope.
5-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
Magic Frequency
This procedure uses the general purpose knob on the front panel to set the Magic
Frequency parameter.
Equipment
Required
One oscilloscope (Item 1)
One SMA 50 W coaxial cable (Item 4)
SMA (Fe) to BNC (Ma) 50 W adapter (Item 5)
Do the following steps to connect the test equipment and set test equipment
controls:
1. Use a SMA coaxial cable and a SMA (female) to BNC (male) adapter to
connect the waveform generator CH1 Output connector to the CH1 input
connector on the oscilloscope.
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator
Oscilloscope (TDS784D)
CH1 input
SMA(Fe)ĆBNC(Ma)
adapter
CH1 output
SMA 50 W coaxial cable
Figure 5-4: Hookup for the marker level adjustment
2. Set the Oscilloscope controls as follows:
Vertic al . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
CH 1 coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
CH 1 sc ale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200mV/div
CH 1 input impedance . . . . . . . . . . 50 W
Horizontal
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 ns/div
Trigger
Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH 1
Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC
Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positive
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 V
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto
5-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
3. Do the following to set the waveform generator controls:
Press UTILITY Ý System Ý Factory Reset Ý OK.
4. Follow the substeps below to load the waveform:
a. Press SETUP Ý Waveform/Sequence Ý Load...
b. Turn the general purpose knob to display the list of waveform files and
highlight the file MODE.WFM.
Press OK to select and load the file.
c. Press the RUN button.
d. Press the CH1 OUTPUT button to ON.
5. Adjust Magic Frequency:
a. Press UTILITY Ý Service
b. Turn the general purpose knob to select Tweak AWG2.
c. Press OK.
d. Press Magic Freq. .
e. Turn the general purpose knob to adjust the waveform on the oscillo-
scope display so that the corruption of the waveform becomes the
maximum.
6. Press Save to save the setting.
7. Disconnect the oscilloscope.
5-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjustment Procedures
5-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
This section contains the information needed to perform periodic and corrective
maintenance on the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
The following subsections are included:
H
H
H
H
H
Related Maintenance Procedures. Provides information relating to various
sections discussing maintenance.
Preparation. Introduction plus general information on preventing damage to
internal modules when doing maintenance.
Inspection and Cleaning. Information and procedures for inspecting the
waveform generator and cleaning the external and internal modules.
Removal and Installation Procedures. Procedures for the removal of
defective modules and replacement of new or repaired modules.
Troubleshooting. Information for isolating failed modules. Included are
instructions for operating the waveform generator internal diagnostic
routines and troubleshooting trees. Most of the trees make use of these
internal diagnostic routines to speed fault isolation to a module.
Related Maintenance Procedures
The following subsections contain information and procedures related to
maintenance.
H
Operating Information provides useful troubleshooting instructions when
operating the waveform generator. It also details the service strategy and lists
options for obtaining maintenance service and replacing failed modules.
H
H
H
Theory of Operation contains a circuit description at the module, or block,
level.
Performance Verification provides procedures that may be useful in isolating
modules problems by testing the waveform generator performance.
Adjustment Procedures addresses after repair adjustment and the interval
between periodic adjustments. It contains a procedure for adjusting the
internal circuits of the waveform generator.
H
H
Diagrams contains a block diagram using individual modules as blocks and
an interconnection diagram showing connections between the modules.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts lists all field replaceable modules by part
number.
6-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Preparation
Before servicing this product, read the Safety Summary and Introduction at the
front of the manual and the ESD information below.
CAUTION. Static discharge can damage any semiconductor component in this
generator. If you are removing a module for service, begin by doing the Access
Procedure on page 6–16. By following the instructions in that procedure, you
remove the module to be serviced while removing the minimum number of
additional modules.
Preventing ESD
When performing any service that requires internal access to the waveform
generator, adhere to the following precautions to avoid damaging internal
modules and components due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
1. Minimize handling of static-sensitive modules.
2. Transport and store static-sensitive modules in their static protected
containers or on a metal rail. Label any package that contains static-sensitive
modules.
3. Discharge the static voltage from your body by wearing a grounded antistatic
wrist strap while handling these modules. Do service of static-sensitive
modules only at a static-free work station.
4. Do not allow anything capable of generating or holding a static charge on the
work station surface.
5. Handle circuit boards by the edges when possible.
6. Do not slide the modules over any surface.
7. Avoid handling modules in areas that have a floor or work-surface covering
capable of generating a static charge.
6-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Susceptibility to ESD
Table 6–1 lists the relative susceptibility of various classes of semiconductors.
Static voltages of 1 kV to 30 kV are common in unprotected environments.
Table 6-1: Relative susceptibility to staticĆdischarge damage
1
Semiconductor classes
Relative susceptibility levels
MOS or CMOS microcircuits or discrete circuits, or linear
microcircuits with MOS inputs (most sensitive)
1
ECL
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Schottky signal diodes
Schottky TTL
HighĆfrequency bipolar transistors
JFET
Linear microcircuits
LowĆpower Schottky TTL
TTL (least sensitive)
1
Voltage equivalent for levels (voltage discharged from a 100ĂpF capacitor through
resistance of 100 ohms):
1Ă=Ă100 to 500 V
2 = 200 to 500 V
3 = 250 V
6 = 600 to 800 V
7 = 400 to 1000 V (est.)
8 = 900 V
4 = 500 V
9 = 1200 V
5 = 400 to 600 V
6-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Inspection and Cleaning
Inspection and Cleaning describes how to inspect for dirt and damage. It also
describes how to clean the exterior and interior of the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generators. Inspection and cleaning are done as preventive mainte-
nance. Preventive maintenance, when done regularly, may prevent waveform
generator malfunctions and enhance its reliability.
Preventive maintenance consists of visually inspecting and cleaning the
waveform generator and using general care when operating it.
How often you perform preventive maintenance depends on the severity of the
environment in which the waveform generator is used. It is recommended that
you perform preventive maintenance just prior to doing the generator adjustment.
General Care
The cabinet helps keep dust out of the waveform generator and should normally
be in place when operating the generator. The generator’s front cover protects the
front panel and display from dust and damage. Install the front cover when
storing or transporting the generator.
Inspection and Cleaning
Procedures
Inspect and clean the waveform generator as often as operating conditions
require. The collection of dirt on components inside can cause them to overheat
and breakdown. (Dirt acts as an insulating blanket, preventing efficient heat
dissipation.) Dirt also provides an electrical conduction path that could cause an
generator failure, especially under high-humidity conditions.
CAUTION. Avoid the use of chemical cleaning agents which can damage plastics
used in this waveform generator. Use only deionized water when cleaning the
menu buttons or front panel buttons. Use an ethyl alcohol solution as a cleaner
and rinse with deionized water. Before using any other type of cleaner, consult
your Tektronix Service Center or representative.
6-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Exterior Inspection. Examine the outside of the generator for damage, wear, and
missing parts, using Table 6–2 as a guide. Waveform generators that appear to
have been dropped or otherwise mishandled should be checked thoroughly to
verify correct operation and performance. Immediately repair defects that could
cause personal injury or cause further generator damage.
Table 6-2: External Inspection Check List
Item
Inspect For
Repair Action
Cabinet, front panel,
and cover
Cracks, scratches, deformations, Repair or replace defective
damaged hardware or gaskets.
module.
Front panel knobs
Missing, damaged, or loose
knobs.
Repair or replace missing or
defective knobs.
Connectors
Broken shells, cracked insulation, Repair or replace defective
modules. Clear or wash out dirt.
and deformed contacts. Dirt in
connectors.
Carrying handle, bail,
cabinet feet.
Correct operation.
Repair or replace defective
module.
Accessories
Missing items or parts of items,
bent pins, broken or frayed
cables, and damaged connecĆ
tors.
Repair or replace damaged or
missing items, frayed cables, and
defective modules.
Exterior Cleaning Procedure. Do the following steps to clean the waveform
generator exterior:
1. Remove loose dust on the outside of the generator with a lint free cloth.
2. Remove remaining dirt with a lint free cloth dampened with a general pur-
pose detergent-and-water solution. Do not use abrasive cleaners.
3. Clean the light filter protecting the monitor screen with a lint-free cloth
dampened with either ethyl alcohol or preferably, a mild, general purpose
detergent-and-water solution.
CAUTION. To prevent getting moisture inside the generator during external
cleaning, use only enough liquid to dampen the cloth or applicator.
6-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Interior Inspection. To access the inside of the waveform generator for inspection
and cleaning, refer to the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section.
Inspect the internal portions of the generator for damage and wear, using
Table 6–3 as a guide. Defects found should be repaired immediately.
CAUTION. To prevent damage from electrical arcing, ensure that circuit boards
and components are dry before applying power to the waveform generator.
Table 6-3: Internal inspection check list
Item
Inspect for
Repair action
Circuit boards
Loose, broken, or corroded
solder connections. Burned
circuit boards. Burned, broken, or
cracked circuitĆrun plating.
Remove failed module and
replace with a new module.
Resistors
Burned, cracked, broken, blisĆ
tered condition.
Remove failed module and
replace with a new module.
Solder connections
Capacitors
Cold solder or rosin joints.
Re-solder joint and clean with
ethyl alcohol.
Damaged or leaking cases.
Corroded solder on leads or
terminals.
Remove damaged module and
replace with a new module from
the factory.
Semiconductors
Loosely inserted in sockets.
Distorted pins.
Firmly seat loose semiconducĆ
tors. Remove devices that have
distorted pins. Carefully straightĆ
en pins (as required to fit the
socket), using longĆnose pliers,
and reinsert firmly. Ensure that
straightening action does not
crack pins, causing them to
break off.
Wiring and cables
Chassis
Loose plugs or connectors.
Burned, broken, or frayed wiring. replace modules with defective
wires or cables.
Firmly seat connectors. Repair or
Dents, deformations, and damĆ
aged hardware.
Straighten, repair, or replace
defective hardware.
6-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
Interior Cleaning Procedure. Do the following steps to clean the generator
interior:
1. Blow off dust with dry, low-pressure, deionized air (approximately 9 psi).
2. Remove any remaining dust with a lint-free cloth dampened in ethyl alcohol
and rinse with warm deionized water. (A cotton-tipped applicator is useful
for cleaning in narrow spaces and on circuit boards.)
NOTE. If, after doing step 1 and 2, a module is clean upon inspection, skip the
remaining steps.
3. If step 1 and 2 do not remove all the dust or dirt, the generator may be spray
washed using a solution of ethyl alcohol by doing steps 4
through 8.
4. Gain access to the parts to be cleaned by removing easily accessible shields
and panels (see Removal and Installation Procedures).
5. Spray wash dirty parts with ethyl alcohol and wait 60 seconds for the
majority of the alcohol to evaporate.
6. Use hot (48.88_ C to 60_ C) (120_ F to 140_ F) deionized water to
thoroughly rinse boards and components.
7. Dry all parts with low-pressure, deionized air.
8. Dry all components and assemblies in an oven or drying compartment using
low-temperature (51.67_ C to 65.56_ C) (125_ F to 150_ F) circulating air.
Lubrication. There is no periodic lubrication required for this generator.
6-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance
6-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This subsection contains procedures for removal and installation of all mechani-
cal and electrical modules. Any electrical or mechanical module, assembly, or
part listed in the Replaceable Mechanical Parts section of this manual is a
module.
Preparation Ċ Preparation for Use
WARNING. Before doing this or any other procedure in this manual, read the
Safety Summary found at the beginning of this manual. Also, to prevent possible
injury to service personnel or damage to the generator components, read
Operating Information:Installation and Preventing ESD in this section.
This subsection contains the following items:
H
Preparatory information that you need to properly do the procedures that
follow.
H
H
List of tools required to remove and disassemble all modules.
Three module locator diagrams for finding the External Modules (see
Figure 6–2), Outer-Chassis Modules (see Figure 6–3), and Inner-Chassis
Modules (see Figure 6–5).
H
H
Procedures for removal and installation of the electrical and mechanical
modules.
A disassembly procedure for removal of all major modules from the
generator at one time and for reassembly of those modules. A complete
disassembly is normally only done when completely cleaning the generator.
(Instructions for doing the actual cleaning are found under Inspection and
Cleaning at the beginning of this section.)
H
Module disassembly procedures.
WARNING. Before doing any procedure in this subsection, disconnect the power
cord from the line voltage source. Failure to do so can cause serious injury or
death.
6-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
List of Modules
The Replaceable Mechanical Parts section lists all modules.
Summary of Procedures
The following procedures are described in the order in which they appear in this
section.
H
The Accsess Procedure on page 6–16 directs you to the procedure(s) (if any)
that are required to access the module to be serviced, then it directs you to
the procedure to remove that module.
H
H
Procedures for External Modules on page 6–17 explain how to remove
modules that do not require internal access to the waveform generator.
Procedures for Internal Modules (1) on page 6–30 are procedures for
removing modules which require access to the internal part of the waveform
generator but are external to the chassis.
H
Procedures for Internal Modules (2) on page 6–44 are procedures for
removing modules which require access to the internal part of the waveform
generator and are internal to the chassis.
Equipment Required. Most modules in this generator can be removed using a
screwdriver with a size #2, Phillips tip. Use this tool whenever a procedure step
instructs you to remove or install a screw unless a different size screwdriver is
specified in that step. All equipment required to remove and install a module are
listed in the first step of each procedure.
Table 6-4: Tools required for module removal
Item no. Name
Description
1
2
3
4
Screwdriver handle
Accepts PhillipsĆdriver bits
PhillipsĆdriver bit for #1 screw size
PhillipsĆdriver bit for #2 screw size
#1 Phillips tip
#2 Phillips tip
FlatĆblade screwdriver
Screwdriver for removing standard-headed
screws
5
NeedleĆNose Pliers
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
Standard tool
1
6
Nutdriver,
@
inch
2
7
Nutdriver, 5.5 mm (7/32 inch)
Nutdriver, 7 mm (9/32 inch)
Retaining Ring Pliers
AngleĆTip Tweezers
Soldering Iron
8
9
10
11
12
13
Pliers
Solder Wick
6-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Table 6-4: Toolsrequired for module removal (Cont.)
Item no. Name
Description
14
15
Adhesive
Wrench, 5/16 inch
TRAĆCON: TraĆBond #BAĆ2114
Srandard tool
Instrument Orientation
Throughout this manual, certain procedures refer to various instrument orienta-
tion, such as front, right, bottom, and top. See Figure 6–1 for an illustration of
how each side is specifically referenced.
Figure 6-1: Instrument orientation
6-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Cabinet
Fuse cap
Line fuse
Line cord
Handle
EMI gasket
Handle cap
Foot
Display
unit
Flip stand
Front panel
knobs
Menu buttons
Output assembly
Front panel
assembly
Trim ring
Figure 6-2: External modules
6-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A10 Connector
board
Rear chassis
Fan
Floppy disk
drive
Hard disk &
Flash disk drive
CPU unit
Power supply
Display unit
Figure 6-3: InternalĂmodulesĂ(1)
6-13
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
CPU module
A40 PCI Interface
GPIB interface
CPU unit
Hard disk &
Flash disk drive
Display unit
Main chassis
Figure 6-4: Internal modules(1)
6-14
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
*A77 Attenuator
board
(except optin02)
A50 AWG board
*A71 Output board
(except option 02)
Figure 6-5: InternalĂmodules(2)
*The product which has option 02 doesn't have A77 Attenuator board.
*The product which has option 02 has A72 outputr board instead of A71 output board.
6-15
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Accsess Procedure
Begin with this procedure when you have identified which module to remove
for service.
1. Find the module to remove in Figure 6–2 through 6–5.
The title of the figure indicates whether the module is an external, internal
module(1), or internal module(2) part.
2. If the module is externally mounted and no internal access is required,
remove the module. Follow the steps in Procedures for External Modules on
page 6–17.
3. If the module is an internal-chassis module and access is required inside of
the instrument; do the Line Fuse and Line Cord procedure followed by the
Cabinet procedure. Both procedures are in the Procedures for External
Modules subsection.
4. After completing those procedures, return to this procedure and continue
with step 5.
5. If the module is an internal module(1), access the inner-chassis.
a. If removing the output assembly or display unit, first do the Trim Ring
found in Procedures for External Modules (page 6–17).
b. Find and do the procedure for the module to be removed in Procedures
for Internal Modules (1) on page 6–30.
6. If the module is an internal module(2), access the reverse side of the chassis.
Since the module is assembled by three classes, perform the following steps
in the order listed.
a. Find and do the procedure for the module you want to remove in
Procedures for Internal Modules (2), page 6–44.
b. Do the procedure A10 Connector Board found in Procedures for Internal
Modules (1), page 6–30.
7. Install all modules previously removed. Read the module removal for service
instructions found at the end of the procedure. These instructions will guide
you in installing all modules previously removed.
6-16
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Procedures for External Modules
Do the Accsess Procedure on page 6–16 before performing any of the procedures
in this subsection.
The following procedures are listed in the order presented.
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Front Panel Knobs
Line Fuse and Line Cord
EMI Gaskets
Cabinet
Trim Ring
A20 Front Panel Assembly
Output Assembly
Cabinet Modules
Front Panel Knobs
You will need angled-tip tweezers (Table 6–4, Item 10).
1. Find the knob(s) to be removed on the front panel.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front is facing you.
3. Remove the knob(s) by pulling it straight out from the front panel to create
some clearance between the base of the knob and the front panel. Insert the
tweezers between the knob and the front panel and remove the knob. See
Figure 6–6.
4. To install, align the knob to the shaft and push in until it snaps into place.
6-17
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
When installing the knobs,
note there are three sizes.
Be sure to reinstall the
proper size knob in the
proper location.
Figure 6-6: Knob removal
6-18
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Line Fuse and Line Cord
You will need a flat-blade screwdriver (Table 6–4, Item 4). Locate the line fuse
and line cord in Figure 6–2.
WARNING. To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the power cord is disconnected
from the socket before checking the line fuse.
1. Orient the generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the rear is
facing you.
2. Disconnect the line cord from the rear panel connector and main power.
3. If you are servicing the line fuse, do the next step; if you are servicing the
line cord, skip to step 5.
4. Find the fuse cap on the rear panel. See Figure 6–7. Remove the fuse cap by
turning it counterclockwise using a flat-blade screwdriver and remove the
line fuse.
5. Find the line cord on the rear cover. See Figure 6–7. Pull the line cord to
complete the removal. Do the procedure in reverse order to install.
6. Do steps 4 and 5 in reverse order to install the line cord and line fuse.
Line Fuse
Fuse Cap
Figure 6-7: Line fuse and line cord removal
6-19
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
EMI Gaskets
Cabinet
Do the following cabinet procedure (see Figure 6–8).
You will need a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Make sure the front cover (optional accessory) is installed. If it is not, install
it by snapping the edges over the trim ring.
2. Locate the cabinet in Figure 6–2, page 6–12.
3. Orient the generator so the front cover is on the work surface and the bottom
side is facing you.
4. Unplug the line cord from its receptacle at the rear cover.
5. Remove the six screws at the rear of the cabinet which secure the two feet.
6. Grasp the left and right edges at the rear of the cabinet.
7. Pull upward to slide the cabinet off the generator. Take care not to bind or
snag the cabinet on the internal cabling as you remove it.
NOTE. Do not do step 8 through 13 to remove the EMI gasket(s) unless it must be
replaced due to damage. If you are not replacing the gasket, skip to step 14.
When installing EMI gaskets and/or the generator cabinet, carefully follow the
instructions given. Unless they are performed properly, the generator may not
meet its emissions requirements (EMI).
8. Locate the EMI gaskets to be removed in Figure 6–2.
9. You will need a pair of needle-nose pliers (Table 6–4, Item 6). Look for the
point where the ends of the gasket touch in the channel at the rear edge of the
cabinet.
10. Use a pair of needle-nose pliers to pry up one of the ends.
11. Grasp the EMI gasket and gently pull it out of the its channel.
12. Repeat steps 9 through 11 to remove the gasket from its channel on the front
casing.
13. To install, press each EMI gasket back into its groove at the rear edge of the
cabinet or front casing. Make sure the ends of the gasket touch, but do not
overlap, when installing. To prevent overlap, cut off any excess length.
14. To install the cabinet, do steps 3 and 4 in reverse order.
a. Take care not to bind or snag the cabinet on internal cabling. Redress the
cables if necessary.
6-20
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
b. When sliding the cabinet, be sure that the front edge of the cabinet aligns
with the groove containing the EMI shield on the front casing.
c. Be sure that the ridge around the rear chassis slides into the groove
containing a second EMI cable at the rear of the cabinet.
d. When installing the four screws at the rear panel, torque to 16 ft-lb.
e. See Line Fuse and Line Cord to install the line cord.
6-21
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-8: Cabinet removal
6-22
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Trim Ring
No tools are needed for this procedure.
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–2, page 6–12.
2. Orient the generator so the rear is on the work surface and the bottom is
facing you.
3. Remove the front cover by grasping it by the left and right edges and snap it
off of the front subpanel. When installing, align and snap back on. See
Figure 6–9.
Trim Ring. When removing the
trim ring, grasp its back edge
and vigorously flex it upward
before pulling it forward.
Menu buttons
Output panel
Figure 6-9: Trim ring and menu buttons removal
6-23
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
CAUTION. To prevent damage to the contacts, do not touch the carbon contact
points on the menu buttons installed in the trim ring. Also, do not touch the
contacts on the exposed flex circuit when you remove the trim ring.
4. Remove the trim ring by grasping the top edge and prying it up and lifting it
forward to snap it off the front subpanel. If servicing the menu buttons, lift
them out of the trim ring. When installing, insert the menu buttons, align the
trim ring to the front subpanel and press it back on.
5. To install the output panel, menu buttons, and trim ring, do step 3 and step 4
in reverse order.
A20 Front Panel Assembly
This procedure includes removal and installation instructions for the front panel
and front panel buttons. Unless either of those modules are being serviced, do
not do step 4.
You will need a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–2, page 6–12.
2. Do the procedure Trim Ring step 1 through step 5, before proceeding to step
3 of this procedure.
3. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front is facing you.
4. Remove the front panel assembly from the front subpanel by lifting the
assembly until you can reach the interconnect cable connecting to the
Connector board.
5. Disconnect the cable at J154 of the Connector board. Disconnect the
flex-board connector at P3 of the front panel assembly. (The flex board is
part of the display-frame assembly.) See Figure 6–10.
6. Lift the front panel assembly out of the front subpanel to complete the
assembly.
6-24
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
P3
To J154
on the Connector
board
FrontĆPanel assembly
Back of
Front-panel
assembly
P2
Figure 6-10: A20 Front panel assembly removal
If the front panel or the front panel buttons need service, do the following steps:
7. Remove the front panel control knobs from the front panel assembly using
the method described in Front Panel Knobs on page 6–17.
8. Remove the eight screws that mount the front panel board to the front panel.
9. Hand disassemble the front panel assembly components using Figure 6–11
as a guide. Do this procedure in reverse order to reassemble using Fig-
ure 6–11 as a guide.
10. To install, reverse this procedure.
6-25
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-11: Disassembly of front panel assembly
Output Assembly
You will need a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–2, page 6–12.
2. Do the Trim Ring and A20 Front panel assembly procedures immediately
preceding this procedure.
3. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front is facing you.
4. To remove the output panel, disconnect the on/off cable at J200 of the A50
AWG board and all the Analog output cables at J190 and J290 of each
A70/A72 Output boards.
5. Remove the three screws at the front side of the chassis, the two screws on
the bottom of the chassis and the two screws at the right side of chassis
attaching the Output assembly to the main chassis.
6. Pull out the Output assembly from the main chassis.
7. To install, reverse this procedure.
6-26
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Output assembly
Figure 6-12: Output assembly removal
Cabinet Modules
You will need a pair of needle-nose pliers (Table 6–4, Item 5).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–2, page 6–12.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the left side is on the work surface and the
handle is facing upward (see Figure 6–13).
3. Remove the handle by inserting the tips of a pair of needle-nose pliers
(Table 6–4, Item 5) into the hole of either handle cap. Push and hold to
depress the handle release.
4. While holding the handle release, pull it out of the slot in the handle cap.
Repeat the procedure to remove the handle from the other handle cap.
5. To install, reverse this procedure.
6. Remove the handle caps by inserting the retaining ring pliers (Table 6–4,
Item 9) into the opening created in the handle cap by removing the handle.
6-27
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
7. While using the pliers to expand the handle cap outward, grasp it and snap it
off.
8. Repeat the procedure to remove the remaining cap as needed; push the cap(s)
back on to install.
9. Remove the flip stand by grasping it on both sides where it joins each flip
stand foot. Now compress the flip stand until the flip stand ends clear the flip
stand feet to complete the removal.
10. To remove the flip stand foot or feet, do the Cabinet procedure (page 6–20)
to gain access to the inside of the cabinet.
11. Working from inside the cabinet, push the two retainers to release the flip
stand foot you wish to remove and lift it away from the outside of the
cabinet.
12. Repeat this procedure to remove as many of the remaining feet as needed.
Insert the two retainers back into their slots in the cabinet and snap any flip
stand foot, previously removed, into place.
13. To install, reverse this procedure.
6-28
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Push down to flex the
handle and flatten against
cabinet; then pull it out.
Handle Cap
removal
Handle removal
Flip Stand
removal
Foot removal
Figure 6-13: Cabinet modules removal
6-29
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Procedures for Internal Modules(1)
You must complete the Access Procedure before doing any of the procedures
described in this subsection. This subsection describes removal/installation
procedures for the following modules:
H
H
H
H
H
H
Fan
Floppy disk drive
Display Assembly
PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply
A10 Connector board
CPU unit
H
H
H
H
CPU Board
A40 PCI Interface Board
GPIB Board
Back Plane Board
H
H
Hard Disk and Flash Disk
Rear chassis
6-30
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Fan
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the fan in Figure 6–3 on page 6–13.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
left side is facing you (see Figure 6–14).
3. Slide the cable connector at the fan to unplug the cable from the Connector
board at J310.
4. Remove the four screws that secure it to the main chassis and lift the fan out.
The large fan uses spacer posts.
5. To install, do the steps in reverse order. Refer to the Cabinet procedure, on
page 6–20, to complete the generator assembly.
J310
A10 Connector Board
Figure 6-14: Fan removal
6-31
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Floppy disk drive
You will need as screwdriver with a size #1 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 2).
1. Locate the modules to be removed, including those listed under Additional
Modules Removed in Figure 6–3, page 6–13.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the top is on the work surface and the left
side is facing you.
3. Unplug the J102 floppy driver connector (ribbon interconnect cable) that
connects the disk drive to the A10 Connector board.
4. Use the screwdriver with a #1 Phillips tip to remove the two screws that
secure the floppy disk drive with bracket to the main chassis, and lift it out
from the chassis using Figure 6–15 as a guide. When removing the disk
drive main body from the bracket, remove the screw that secures the drive to
the bracket, then pull out the disk drive.
5. To install, do this procedure in reverse order. Refer to the Cabinet procedure
on page 6–20 to complete the generator assembly.
J102
Figure 6-15: Floppy disk drive removal
6-32
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Display Assembly
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–3, on page 6–13.
2. Do the Trim Ring, Menu Button and A20 Front Panel Assembly procedures
immediately preceding this procedure.
3. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front panel is facing you (see Figure 6–16).
4. Unplug the LCD and Back Light connectors J225 and J245 on the A10
Connector board.
5. Unplug the LCD connector on the right side of the LCD display by pushing
toward the rear panel.
6. Remove the four screws on the top and bottom of the display frame that
mount the display assembly to the chassis.
7. Remove the display frame, filter, and filter retainer.
8. Remove the LCD display and bracket by pulling it out from left side.
Display assembly
Figure 6-16: Display assembly removal
9. To install, do this procedure in the reverse order.
6-33
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
10. See the following procedures, in the order shown, to complete the reassemb-
ly of the waveform generator:
H
H
H
A20 Front Panel Assembly (page 6–24)
Trim Ring, Menu Buttons (page 6–23)
Cabinet (page 6–20) (completes reassembly)
PS100 Low Voltage Power
Supply
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the Power Supply in Figure 6–3, page 6–13.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
right side is facing you.
3. To remove the low-voltage power supply, unplug four power cables from J3
on the A10 Connector board and J1, J2, and J4 on the A50 Sequence board.
See Figure 6–17.
4. Remove the two screws on the left side of the rear Principal Power switch
and the power cable connector of the generator that mount the low-voltage
power supply to the rear chassis.
5. Remove the four screws from the top of the supply, the five screws at the
bottom, and the one screw from the side that mounts the supply to the main
chassis. Then remove the screw securing the ground lead to the main chassis.
6. Lift the module up and out of the generator to complete the removal.
7. To install, do this procedure in reverse order then refer to the Cabinet
procedure, on page 6–20 to complete assembly of the generator.
6-34
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
J3
J010
J4
J2
J1
Figure 6-17: Power supply module removal
6-35
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A10 Connector Board
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–3, page 6–13.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front is facing you.
3. To disconnect the A10 Connector board, disconnect the following cables and
connectors. See Figure 6–18 as a guide.
H
H
H
H
Fan power cable at J310
Cable from the low–voltage power supply at J010
Cable to the PCI Backplane power supply at J320
J245 LCD Backlight, J225 TFT LCD and J102 Floppy disk driver
connector
H
H
Interconnect cables from CPU board at J100 CPU FDD, J110 CPU
MISC, J150 CPU VGA & COM1 and J220 CPU LCD
Interconnect cables to the Monitor Out at J152 and the A90 Key
board at J112
H
H
Interconnect cable from the PCI Interface at 200
Cables from the A20 Front Panel board at J154
4. Use a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip to remove the five screws that
attach the A11 Connector board to the HDD bracket.
5. Lift the board up and out from the HDD bracket to complete the removal.
6. To install, do this procedure in reverse order. Refer to the Cabinet procedure
on page 6–20 to complete the assembly of the generator.
6-36
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-18: A10 connector board removal
6-37
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
CPU unit
This procedure describes how to remove the following circuit boards that are
contained in the CPU unit:
H
H
H
H
H
CPU board
Hard Disk and Flash Disk
A40 PCI Interface Board
GPIB Board
Back Plane
NOTE. The Lithium polycarbon monofluoride battery on the CPU board is not
user-replaceable. Removing the battery erases calendar backup data. Replace
the CPU board as a unit. Dispose of the used battery in the proper environmen-
tal manner.
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–4, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
right side is facing you.
3. Remove the CPU unit using Figure 6–19 as a guide while doing the
following substeps:
a. Unplug the GPIB interconnect cable at the GPIB board and the LAN
interconnect cable and the VGA and COM1 interconnect cable at the
CPU board.
b. Unplug the LCD flat cable, FDD flat cable, HDD IDE flat cable, and the
MISC flat cable at the CPU board.
c. Unplug the two flat cables from the A50 Sequence board and the flat
cable from the A10 Connector board at the A40 PCI Interface board.
d. Remove the two screws on the bottom and the two screws on the right
side.
e. Lift the CPU Unit up and out from the main chassis.
6-38
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Figure 6-19: CPU unit removal
4. Remove the CPU board using Figure 6–20 as a guide while doing the
following substeps:
a. Use a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip to remove the screw that
secures the CPU board to the frame with a retainer on the the right side
of the unit.
b. Remove the screw on the left side of the CPU board.
c. Grasp the board and slide it out of the unit.
6-39
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
CPU board
A40 PCI Interface board
GPIB board
Figure 6-20: CPU, A40 PCI Interface, and GPIB boards removal
5. Remove the A40 PCI Interface board (using a screwdriver with a size #2
Phillips tip) by removing the screw on the left side of the board. See Figure
6–20.
6. Grasp the board and slide it out.
7. Remove the GPIB board (using a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip) by
removing the screw on the left side of the GPIB board. See Figure 6–20.
8. Grasp the board and slide it out.
9. Remove the Back Plane (using a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip) by
removing the four screws securing the board to the frame. See Figure 6–20.
10. Grasp the board and slide it out.
11. To install, do this procedure in reverse order.
12. Refer to the Cabinet procedure on page 6–20 to complete the assembly of
the waveform generator.
6-40
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Hard disk and Flash disk
This procedure describes how to remove the Hard Disk and Flash Disk unit.
You will need a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–4, page 6–14.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
front is facing you.
3. The hard disk unit is beneath the A10 board. Do the A10 Connector board
removal procedure (page 6–24) before continuing this procedure.
4. Unplug the IDE interface cable from the IDE interface connector on the disk
drive.
5. Use a screwdriver with a size Phillips #2 tip to remove the four screws that
secure the hard disk and flash disk bracket to the chassis. See Figure 6–21.
6. Remove the four screws that secure the hard disk drive and the flash disk
drive to the bracket.
Flash disk
Hard disk
Figure 6-21: Hard disk and flash disk removal
6-41
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Rear Chassis
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1 and
3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–3, page 6–13.
2. Do the PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply procedure (page 6–34) to remove
the power supply module.
3. Install the front cover (optional accessory) if it is not already installed.
4. Orient the waveform generator so the bottom is on the work surface and the
rear is facing you.
5. Remove the rear chassis using Figure 6–22 as a guide when doing the
following substeps:
a. Unplug these cables:
H
H
GPIB interconnect cable at GPIB card in the CPU Unit
LAN interconnect cable and the Option port interconnect cable at the
connector on the CPU board
H
Cable to DISPLAY MONITOR OUT at J152 and KEYBOARD at
J112 on the A10 Connector board
H
H
Event In cable at J1000 on the A5– Sequence board
Clock In at J210, Clock Out at J700, 10MHz Ref In at J500, 10MHz
Ref Out at J530, and Trig In at J300 coax cables on the A50
Sequence board
H
H
CHx Add In at J300 coax cable on the A70/A72 Output board
CHx Marker1 at J1004 and Marker2 at J1006 coax cables on the
A52 AWG board
b. Remove the five screws that secure the rear chassis to the main chassis.
6-42
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
IEEE STD 488 PORT
to J110
10 MHz REF IN to J130
TRIG IN to J200
10 BASE-T to
the LAN interface
KEYBOARD
to J128
EVENT IN
to J200
DISPLAY MONITOR OUT
to J127
1/4 CLOCK OUT to J500
10 MHz REF OUT to J150
Figure 6-22: Rear chassis removal
6. To install, do this procedure in the reverse order. Complete the assembly in
the order listed.
H
H
PS100 Low Voltage Power Supply (page 6–34)
Cabinet (page 6–20)
6-43
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Procedures for Internal Modules(2),
You must complete the Access Procedure on page 6–16 before doing any of the
procedures for the Internal modules(2). The procedures are presented in the
following order:
H
H
H
H
A77 Attenuator Board (except option 02)
A72 Output Board (except option 02)
A50 AWG board
A72 Output Board (for option 02)
The option 02 model doesn’t have A77 attenuator board, and it has A72 output
board instead of A71 output board.
A77 Attenuator Board
(except option 02)
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1 and
3). The A77 Attenuator board is contained in the aluminum shield case.
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–5, page 6–15.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the top is on the work surface and the rear
is facing you.
3. Remove the A77 Attenuator Board with the shield case using Figure 6–23 on
page 6–45 as a guide.
a. Unplug these cables:
H
H
H
Output cables to CH1 and CH1 Output connecter
Two cables from the A50 AWG board
Eight cables from the A71 Output board
b. Remove the five screws on the upper surface attaching the shield case to
the A72 Output Board.
4. Lift the shield case including the A77 Attenuator Board up perpendicularly
from the A72 Output Board to complete the removal.
NOTE. The A77 Attenuator board has two connectors on the front and rear
panels and is connected tot he A71 Output board. If the post spacer(s) is
removed with the output board, remove the spacer(s) and screw it back into its
mounting hole.
5. To open a shield case, remove the four screws on both sides of it.
6. To install, do the procedure in the reverse order.
6-44
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A77 Attenuator
board
A50 AWG board
A71 Output board
Figure 6-23: Removal of the A77, A71 and A50 boards (except option 02)
6-45
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A71 Output Board
(except option 02)
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1
and 3).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–5, page 6–15.
2. Orient the waveform generator so its top is down on the work surface and its
front is facing you.
3. Perform the A77 Attenuator Board procedure that precedes this procedure to
remove the interconnect cables.
4. Remove the A72 Output Board using Figure 6–23 on page 6–45 as a guide.
5. Unplug the eight cables from the A77 Attenuator Board.
6. Remove the six screws on the front panel and rear panel sides that attach the
A72 Output Board to the A50 AWG board.
7. Lift the Output board up perpendicularly from the A50 AWG board to
complete the removal.
NOTE. A72 Output Board has a connector on the front panel side, and is
connected with A50 AWG board. In case you remove A72 Output Board, raise
perpendicularly. If the post spacer(s) is removed with the output board, remove
the spacer(s) and screw it back into its mounting hole.
8. To install, do this procedure in the reverse order and proceed to the Cabinet
procedure (page 6–20) to complete the assembly.
6-46
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A50 AWG Board
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4, Items 1 and 3)
and a nutdriver 5.5 mm (Table 6–4, Item 7).
(A common circuit board)
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–5, page 6–15.
2. Orient the waveform generator so the top is on the work surface and the rear
is facing you.
3. Perform the A77 Attenuator Board and A72 Output Board procedures prior
to this procedure to remove the Sequence board.
4. Unplug the following cables and connectors:
H
H
H
H
H
Three power supply cables J610, J630 and J670
Flat cable from Event Input at J560
Flat cable from A22 On/Off board at J600
Two flat cables from PCI Interface board at J100 and J110
Coax cables from 10MHz Ref Out at J5230, 10MHz Ref In at J5210, 1/4
Clock Out at J5450 and Trigger In at J5100
H
Four coax cables from Marker Out at J5510, J5511, J5610 and J5611
5. Remove the A50 AWG board using Figure 6–23 on page 6–45 as a guide.
a. Remove the six spacer posts.
b. Remove the eight screws that attach the Sequencer board to the main
chassis.
6. To install, do the procedure in the reverse order.
6-47
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A72 Output board
A50 AWG board
Figure 6-24: Removal of the A77, A72 and A50 boards (for option 02)
6-48
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
A72 Output Board
(option 02 only)
You will need a screwdriver with a size #2 Phillips tip (Table 6–4 of page6–10,
Items 1, 3 and 15).
1. Locate the modules to be removed in Figure 6–5, page 6–15.
2. Orient the waveform generator so its top is down on the work surface and its
front is facing you.
3. Unplug the analog output cables with SMA connectors of K100 and K200.
4. Unplug the MKD1 cable with J5400 of the A50 AWG board, the MKD2
cable with J5401.
The MKDx is mentioned in the tip of each cable.
5. Remove the A72 Output board on the post spacer with six-
screws(211–0751–00).
6. Remove the A72 Output Board using Figure 6–24 on page 6–48 as a guide.
7. Lift the A72 Output board up perpendicularly from the A50 AWG board to
complete the removal.
8. To install, do this procedure in the reverse order and proceed to the Cabinet
procedure (page 6–20) to complete the assembly.
6-49
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
6-50
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
This subsection contains information and procedures designed to help you isolate
faulty modules in the waveform generator. If a module needs to be replaced,
follow the Removal and Installation Procedures in this section.
This subsection consists of the following flowcharts:
H
H
Figure 6–25: Primary Troubleshooting Procedure on page 6–52.
Figure 6–26: Troubleshooting Procedure 1 - Power Supply Module on page
6–53.
H
H
H
Figure 6–28: Troubleshooting Procedure 2 - CPU or Front-panel Module on
page 6–55.
Figure 6–29: Troubleshooting Procedure 3 - LCD and backlight on page
6–56.
Figure 6–31: Troubleshooting Procedure 4 - Module Isolation on page 6–58.
See Figure 6–27 for power supply connectors and Figure 6–30 for the A10
connector board.
Diagnostics
The waveform generator has two levels of internal diagnostics that focus on
verifying, adjusting, and if necessary, isolating faulty modules.
Both levels of the internal diagnostics report any bad modules and/or interfaces.
If a bad module and/or interface is found, use the troubleshooting procedures in
this section to determine which module needs to be replaced.
The two levels of diagnostics are the short confidence set and the extended set
that tests the oscilloscope circuitry in depth and takes more time. Upon powering
on, the waveform generator automatically executes the short set. The extended
set is optional and is executed by using the following procedure:
Prerequisites: Power on the waveform generator and allow a 20 minute warm-up
before doing this procedure:
1. Display the diagnostics menu: Press UTILITY ! Diag.
2. Select the menu: Select ALL using the general purpose knob.
3. Run the diagnostics: Press Execute Diagnostic.
4. Wait: The internal diagnostics do an exhaustive verification of proper
function. This verification will take several minutes. When finished, the
waveform generator will display a report listing any bad modules and/or
interfaces.
6-51
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Press the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH on the rear panel to ON, and
then toggle the ON/STBY button on the
front panel of the generator to ON.
Press the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH to
OFF and remove the cover using the Rear
Cover and Cabinet removal procedure. Check
all the cables coming out of the power supply
module and the cabling between modules. Be
sure every cable is attached securely.
Can you
No
Disconnect the fan cable
and power on.
hear the fan
running?
Yes
Is
the voltage on
A10 board
T P030 : +5 V
TP010 : +12 V
T P020 : -5 V
?
Perform the power supply module
troubleshooting procedure 1
(page 6-53).
No
With the
generator power on,
do the front panel lights
Perform the front panel
Yes
No
module troubleshooting
procedure 2
(page 6-55).
and PANEL LOCK LED blinks for a
while and go off later (all LED s
except SETUP and
Replace the Fun
(page 6-31).
CH1 LED)?
Yes
Press the PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH to OFF
and remove the cabinet
using the Rear Cover and
Cabinet removal procedure.
Perform the LCD and
Backlight inverter
troubleshooting
procedure 3
Does the
display seem
to be working
at all?
No
(page 6-33).
Yes
Does the
generator respond
correctly when the
front panel buttons
are pushed?
Perform the CPU module
troubleshooting procedure 2
(page 6-55).
No
Yes
Does
Perform the module isolation
troubleshooting procedure 4
(page 6-31).
the generator power
on and pass all the
diagnostics?
No
Done.
Figure 6-25: Primary troubleshooting procedure
6-52
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Is
Use this procedure to
troubleshoot the power
supply module.
the PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH in the
ON position?
No
Turn on the PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH.
Yes
Is
Does
the fuse blow
again?
Turn off the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH. Replace the fuse. Turn
on the principal power switch.
No
Yes
line fuse
ok?
Yes
No
Turn on
Turn off the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH and remove the cover using the
Cabinet removal procedure. Check all the
cables coming out of the power supply
module and the cabling between modules.
Be sure every cable is attached securely.
the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH. Can you hear
the tick of relay actuator
in the power supply
module?
No
Yes
Are the
voltages on the
Turn off the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH. Remove the generator cabinet
using the cabinet removal procedure.
Check the cables from the A11
Connector board. Disconnect the cables
at J1 and J2 on the power supply module.
Press
A11 Connector board
TP030 : +5 V, TP010 : +12 V
TP030 : -5 V (see Figure 6-30
on page 6-57)?
Yes
No
No
the ON/STBY button.
Does the generator
power on?
Yes
Press the ON/STBY button. Check
these power supply voltages on J3
on the A10 Connector board:
Fix the power problem.
+5 V"3%, -5 V"5%, +12 V"5%.
Check these power supply voltages
on J2 on the power supply module:
-2 V"20%, -8 V"20%, +8 V"20%
(see Figure 6-27 for the power supply
connector pin assignment).
Replace the power
supply module
(page 6-34).
Are
No
the voltages
ok?
Yes
The power supply module is ok.
Perform isolation troubleshooting for
the modules on the bottom of the
generator.
Figure 6-26: Troubleshooting procedure 1 Ċ Power Supply module
6-53
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
*Remote
On
-5 V
NC
*Power
Fail
+5 V
+12 V
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
1
J3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
GND
Power Supply module
J10 on the A10 Connector board
(See above for the pin assignment)
J4
J2
J1
(See below for the
pin assignment)
+8 V
-8 V
+3.3 V
+12 V
14 13 12 11 10
+5 V
-2 V
-5 V
9
2
8
1
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
12 11 10
9
3
8
2
7
1
J4
J1
J2
7
6
5
4
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
GND
GND
GND
*15 V/8 Vsel
CAUTION. NEVER connect the pin *15 V/8 Vsel to anywhere.
It must always be open to avoid damage to the power supply module.
Figure 6-27: Power supply connectors
6-54
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
Use this procedure to
determine if the CPU or the
frontĆpanel module is bad.
Turn on the PRINCIPAL POWER
SWITCH on the rear panel, and
then turn on the ON/STBY button
on the front panel
Do
Is the voltage
all front panel
LEDs turn on and
the PANEL LOCK
LED blink for a
while?
Turn off the PRINCIPAL
POWER SWITCH ,
remove the cabinet, then
turn the power back on.
of TP030 on A10
board : 5 V
(see Figure
6-30)
No
No
Fix the problem on A10 board.
Yes
Yes
Do
the Front Panel
No
buttons work
correctly?
Yes
Are all front
panel cables securely
installed in their sockets
and are the cables
ok?
No
Securely install and/ or replace
the front panel cables.
The front panel
module is ok.
Yes
Replace the CPU module.
Figure 6-28: Troubleshooting procedure 2 Ċ CPU or front panel module
6-55
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This procedure helps you
determine whether the LCD
or/and Backlight inverter
is bad.
The
voltageof
TP030 on theA10
connector board is
+5 V and TP010 is
+12 V?
Check the Power
supply and A10
Connector board.
Is a screen
pitch-black?
Yes
No
No
Yes
The
voltageof
No
TP030 on theA10
connector board is
+5 V ?
Check the Power
supply and A10
Connector board.
Is thecable
connected to J245 on A10
board securely installed in
their sockets and
arethecables
Securely install
and/or replace the
cables.
No
Yes
ok?
Yes
Are
the50 pin flat cable
Replace the
Backlight inverter.
connected to J220 on A10
board and thecableconnected
toĂJ225 on A10 board
No
securelyĂinstalled in their sockets
and arethecables
ok?
Securely install
and/or replace
thecables.
Yes
Replace the
TFT LCD.
Figure 6-29: Troubleshooting procedure 3 Ċ LCD module
6-56
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
J320
J120
J100
J110
J154
J200
J150
J225
J220
J112
J152
J122
TP030 +5V
TP020 -5V
J245
TP010 +12V
J102
J240
J310
J010
A10 Connector board
Figure 6-30: A10 connector board
6-57
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation Procedures
This procedure assumes
that the waveform generator is
up and running and you can
read the display.
Select the extended diagnostics
Does the
display report
any errors?
Are any
failures
reported?
menu and run all the test suites (the
discussion of the Diagnostics on
page 6-51 explains how to do this).
No
No
The waveform generator is ok.
Yes
Yes
Diagnostics
Related module
CPU board (page 6-38)
A10 Connector board (page 6-36)
A20 Front Panel board (page 6-24)
A40 PCI Interface board (page 6-24)
A50 AWG board (page 6-47 )
System
A40 PCI Interface board (page 6-24)
A50 AWG board (page 6-47)
Run mode
Clock
A50 AWG board (page 6-47)
Output
A71 Output board (page 6-46)
A77 Attenuator board (page 6-44)
Sequence Memory
Waveform Memory
A50 AWG board (page 6-47)
A50 AWG board (page 6-47)
Can the
data be read or
written from/to
formatted floppy
disk?
Check all cables. Be sure every
cable is attached securely. Replace
the module indicated in the
Does the
display report
any errors?
Replace the floppyĆdisk
drive module
(page 6-32).
No
No
diagnostics. Run all diagnostics.
Yes
Yes
Done.
Figure 6-31: Troubleshooting procedure 4 Ċ Module isolation
6-58
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Error and event codes with negative values are SCPI standard codes. Error and
event codes with positive values are unique to the waveform generator series
number.
Table 6–5 lists event code definitions. When an error occurs, you can find its
error class by checking for its the code range in Tables 6–6 through 6–14. Events
in these tables are organized by event class.
Table 6-5: Definition of event codes
Event class
Code range
0
Description
No error
No event or status
Command errors
Execution errors
DeviceĆspecific errors
Query errors
-100 to -199
-200 to -299
-300 to -399
-400 to -499
-500 to -599
-600 to -699
-700 to -799
-800 to -899
1 to 32767
Command syntax errors
Command execution errors
Internaldevice errors
System event and query errors
PowerĆon events
PowerĆon events
User request events
Request controlevents
Operation complete events
Extended deviceĆspecific errors
Reserved
User request events
Request controlevents
Operation complete events
Device dependent device errors
not used
other than above
AWG710 Service Manual
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Command Errors
Command errors are returned when there is a syntax error in the command.
Table 6-6: Command errors
Error code
-100
-101
-102
-103
-104
-105
-108
-109
-110
-111
Error message
Command error
Invalid character
Syntax error
Invalid separator
Data type error
GET not allowed
Parameter not allowed
Missing parameter
Command header error
Header separator error
Program mnemonic too long
Undefined header
-112
-113
-114
-115
-120
-121
-123
-124
-128
Header suffix out of range
Unexpected number of parameters
Numeric data error
Invalid character in number
Exponent too large
Too many digits
Numeric data not allowed
AWG710 Service Manual
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-6: Command errors (Cont.)
Error code
-130
-131
-134
-138
-140
-141
-144
-148
-150
-151
-158
-160
-161
-168
-170
-171
-178
-180
-181
-183
-184
Error message
Suffix error
Invalid suffix
Suffix too long
Suffix not allowed
Character data error
Invalid character data
Character data too long
Character data not allowed
String data error
Invalid string data
String data not allowed
Block data error
Invalid block data
Block data not allowed
Expression error
Invalid expression
Expression data not allowed
Macro error
Invalid outside macro definition
Invalid inside macro definition
Macro parameter error
AWG710 Service Manual
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Execution Errors
These error codes are returned when an error is detected during command
execution.
Table 6-7: Execution errors
Error code
-200
-201
-202
-203
-210
-211
-212
-213
-214
-215
-220
-221
-222
-223
-224
-225
-226
-230
-231
-232
-233
-240
-241
-250
-251
-252
Error message
Execution error
Invalid while in local
Settings lost due to RTL
Command protected
Trigger error
Trigger ignored
Arm ignored
Init ignored
Trigger deadlock
Arm deadlock
Parameter error
Settings conflict
Data out of range
Too much data
Illegal parameter value
Out of memory
Lists not same length
Data corrupt or stale
Data questionable
Invalid format
Invalid version
Hardware error
Hardware missing
Mass storage error
Missing mass storage
Missing media
AWG710 Service Manual
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-7: Execution errors (Cont.)
Error code
-253
-254
-255
-256
-257
-258
-260
-261
-270
-271
-272
-273
-274
-275
-276
-277
-278
-280
-281
-282
-283
-284
-285
-286
-290
-291
-292
-293
-294
Error message
Corrupt media
Media full
Directory full
File name not found
File name error
Media protected
Expression error
Math error in expression
Macro error
Macro syntax error
Macro execution error
Illegal macro label
Macro parameter error
Macro definition too long
Macro recursion error
Macro rejuvenation not allowed
Macro header not found
Program error
Cannot create program
Illegal program name
Illegal variable name
Program currently running
Program syntax error
Program runtime error
Memory use error
Out of memory
Referenced name does not exist
Referenced name already exists
Incompatible type
AWG710 Service Manual
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Device Specific Errors
These error codes are returned when an internal instrument error is detected. This
type of error can indicate a hardware problem.
Table 6-8: Device specific errors
Error code
-300
-310
-311
Error message
Device specific error
System error
Memory error
-312
-313
-314
-315
-320
-321
-330
-340
-350
-360
-361
-362
-363
-365
PUD memory lost
Calibrationmemory lost
Save/recall memory lost
Configuration memory lost
Storage fault
Out of memory
SelfĆtest failed
Calibrationfailed
Queue overflow
Communication error
Parity error inprogram message
Framing error in program message
Input buffer overrun
Time out error
AWG710 Service Manual
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Query Errors
These error codes are returned in response to an unanswered query.
Table 6-9: Query errors
Error code
-400
Error message
query error
-410
query INTERRUPTED
-420
query UNTERMINATED
query DEADLOCKED
-430
-440
query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
PowerĆOn Events
These events occur when the instrument detects an off to on transition in its
power supply.
Table 6-10: PowerĆon events
Event code
Event message
-500
Power on
User Request Events
These events are unused in the AWG710 Waveform Generator.
Table 6-11: User request events
Event code
Event message
-600
User request
AWG710 Service Manual
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Request Control Events
This event is unused in the AWG710 Waveform Generator.
Table 6-12: Request control events
Event code
Event message
-700
Request control
Operation Complete Events
This event occurs when the synchronization protocol, having been enabled by an
*OPC command, completes all selected pending operations.
Table 6-13: Operation complete events
Event code
Event message
-800
Operation complete
AWG710 Service Manual
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Device Errors
Table 6–14 lists AWG400 series error code and their meaning.
Table 6-14: Messages and codes
ErĆ
rorĂcode
ErrorĂmessage
RelatedĂmodule
SupplementaryĂInformation
/* ---- Calibration ---- */
CH1 internal offset calibration failure
1101
1104
1201
1204
1301
1304
1401
1404
1501
1504
1601
1604
1611
1614
1621
1624
1631
1634
1641
1644
1701
1704
1711
1714
1721
1724
1731
1734
1741
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
CH1 internal offset calibration failure
CH1 output offset calibration failure
CH1 output offset calibration failure
CH1 Gain calibration failure
CH1 Gain calibration failure
CH1 Gain difference calibration failure
CH1 Gain difference calibration failure
CH1 Direct output Gain calibration failure
CH1 Direct output Gain calibration failure
CH1 Attenuator calibration failure
CH1 Attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x5dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x5dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x5dB 2 attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x5dB 2 attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x10dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x10dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x20dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 x20dB attenuator calibration failure
CH1 Filter calibration failure
CH1 Filter calibration failure
CH1 20MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 20MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 50MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 50MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 100MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 100MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 200MHz Filter calibration failure
AWG710 Service Manual
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-14: Messages and codes (Cont.)
ErĆ
rorĂcode
ErrorĂmessage
RelatedĂmodule
SupplementaryĂInformation
1744
CH1 200MHz Filter calibration failure
CH1 Reference level calibration failure
CH1 Reference level calibration failure
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
1801
A71 (Output)
A71 (Output)
Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
1804
/* ---- System Diagnostics ---- */
2100
2101
2102
System failure
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Realtime clock power
Configuration record and Check-sum staĆ
tus
2103
2104
2105
2106
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2700
Incorrect configuration
Memory size miscompare
Fixed-disk drive initialization status
Time status
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
CPU/Flash Disk/HDD
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
A20 (Front Panel)
Flash Disk
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check CPU/Flash Disk/HDD and connection.
Check A20 And connection.
Front panel failure
Front panel configuration
Front panel communication
Front panel RAM
Check A20 and connection.
Check A20 and connection.
Check A20 and connection.
Front panel ROM
Check A20 and connection.
Front panel A/D
Check A20 and connection.
Front panel timer
Check A20 and connection.
Calibration data failure
Check Flash Disk. Also possible no calibration
after A50/A70 were exchanged.
2701
2702
2703
Calibration data not found
Calibration data checksum
Calibration data invalid
Flash Disk
Flash Disk
Flash Disk
Check Flash Disk. Also possible no calibration
after A50/A70 were exchanged.
Check Flash Disk. Also possible no calibration
after A50/A70 were exchanged.
Check Flash Disk. Also possible no calibration
after A50/A70 were exchanged.
/* ---- RunMode Diagnostics ---- */
3000
3100
Run mode failure
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Run mode Control register0 failure
3101-3108 Run mode control register0 bit0 to bit7
3200
3201
3211
Run mode control register1 failure
Run mode control register1 reg0
Run mode control register1 reg10
/* ---- Clock Diagnostics ---- */
4000
Clock failure
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
AWG710 Service Manual
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-14: Messages and codes (Cont.)
ErĆ
rorĂcode
ErrorĂmessage
RelatedĂmodule
SupplementaryĂInformation
4100
PLL lock/unlock failure
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
/* ---- Sequence Memory Diagnostics ---- */
5000
5100
Sequence memory failure
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Sequence memory data bus failure
5101-5132 Sequence memory data bus bit0 to bit31
5200 Sequence memory address bus failure
5201-5216 Sequence memory address bus bit0 to
bit15
5300
5301-5302 Sequence memory chip 0 to chip 1
5350 Sequence memory chip select failure
Sequence memory chip cell failure
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
5351-5352 Sequence memory chip select 0 to select 1 A50 (AWG)
/* ---- WaveformMemory Diagnostics ---- */
6000
6100
Waveform memory failure
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
CH1 Waveform memory data bus failure
6101-6132 CH1 Waveform memory data bus bit0 to
bit31
6150
CH1 Waveform memory chip data bus
failure
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
6151-6186 CH1 Waveform memory chip data bus bit0 A50 (AWG)
to bit35
6200
CH1 Waveform memory address bus
failure
A50 (AWG)
6201-6219 CH1 Waveform memory address bus bit0
to bit18
A50 (AWG)
6300
6301-6336 CH1 Waveform memory chip0 to chip35
6350
CH1 Waveform memory chip cell failure
A50 (AWG)
A50 (AWG)
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
Check A50 (AWG).
CH1 Waveform memory chip select failure A50 (AWG)
6351-6386 CH1 Waveform memory chip select 0 to
select 35
A50 (AWG)
/* ---- Output Diagnostics ---- */
7000
7100
7101
7104
7200
Output failure
A70 (Output)
A70 (Output)
A70 (Output)
A70 (Output)
Also possible D/A converter and so forth on A52.
Also possible D/A converter and so forth on A52.
Also possible D/A converter and so forth on A52.
Also possible D/A converter and so forth on A52.
Internal offset failure
CH1 internal offset
CH1 internal offset
Output offset failure
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
AWG710 Service Manual
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-14: Messages and codes (Cont.)
ErĆ
rorĂcode
7201
7204
7300
7301
7304
7400
7401
7404
7510
7511
7514
7520
7521
7524
7530
7531
7534
7540
7541
7544
7610
7611
7614
7620
7621
7624
7630
7631
7634
7640
7641
7644
7700
7701
ErrorĂmessage
RelatedĂmodule
SupplementaryĂInformation
CH1 output offset failure
CH1 output offset failure
Arb gain failure
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
CH1 Arb gain
CH1 Arb gain
Direct Gain failure
CH1 Direct Gain
CH1 Direct Gain
5dB 1 attenuator failure
CH1 5dB 1 attenuator
CH1 5dB 1 attenuator
5dB 2 attenuator 1 failure
CH1 5dB 2 attenuator
CH1 5dB 2 attenuator
10dB attenuator 2 failure
CH1 10dB attenuator
CH1 10dB attenuator
20dB attenuator failure
CH1 20dB attenuator
CH1 20dB attenuator
20MHz filter failure
CH1 1MHz filter
CH1 20MHz filter
50MHz filter failure
CH1 50MHz filter
CH1 50MHz filter
100MHz filter failure
CH1 100MHz filter
CH1 100MHz filter
200MHz filter failure
CH1 200MHz filter
CH1 200MHz filter
Reference level failure
Reference level failure
AWG710 Service Manual
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
Table 6-14: Messages and codes (Cont.)
ErĆ
rorĂcode
ErrorĂmessage
RelatedĂmodule
SupplementaryĂInformation
7704
Reference level failure
A71 (Output)/A77 (ATT) Check A71 (Output), A77 (ATT) and connection.
-
9111
Waveform/Sequence load error: waveform
memory full
9112
9113
9114
9121
9122
9123
9124
9125
Waveform/Sequence load error: invalid waĆ
veform length
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Waveform/Sequence load error: waveform
length too short
Waveform/Sequence load error: waveform
length changed
Sequence load error: missing file name in
sequence
Sequence load error: too many nesting levĆ
els
Sequence load error: infinite loop in sub-
sequence
Sequence load error: infinite sub-seĆ
quence loop
Sequence load error: max sequence eleĆ
ments exceeded
9126
9127
Sequence load error: invalid jump address
-
-
Sequence load error: sequence memory
full
9128
9129
9151
9152
Sequence load error: infinite loop and Goto
One not allowed
-
-
-
-
Sequence load error: infinite loop and Goto
<N> not allowed
Waveform load warning: output disabled in
some channels
Waveform/Sequence output warning: outĆ
put disabled
AWG710 Service Manual
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messages and Codes
AWG710 Service Manual
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Accessories
This subsection describes the various options as well as the standard and optional
accessories that are available for the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
Power Cord Options
Table7–1 lists the power cords available with the AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform
Generator.
Table 7-1: Power cord options
Plug configuration
Normal usage
Option number
North America
125 V
Standard
Europe
230 V
A1
A2
United Kingdom
230 V
Australia
230 V
A3
Switzerland
230 V
A5
China
230 V
AC
A99
No power cord supplied.
7-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Accessories
Options
This subsection describes the following options available with the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator Arbitrary Waveform Generator:
Option 1R (Rack
Mounting)
AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator. comes configured for installation in a
19-inch wide instrument rack. For later field conversions, order Rack Mount Kit
(020–A045–00) or contact your local Tektronix sales office or representative.
Option D1 (Test Result
Report)
A calibration data test result report will be provided with the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator when this option is specified.
Option 01 (32 MB Words
Memory)
Increase memory length up to 32 MB (32400000 points).
Option 02 (High
Expand output bandwidth
The product which has option 02 doesn’t have offset and lowpass filter function,
also, main output amplitude of 20mVpk-pk to 2Vpk-pk is changed to 500mVpk-
pk to 1Vpk-pk into a 50 Ohm load.
Bandwidth Output)
Option 10 (Flash Disk)
Flash disk addition. The hard disk is deleted when this option is ordered. This
option allows 24 hour continuous operation. The number of points used in the
Waveform Editor is restricted because of the reduced disk space.
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator retains the state of the front panel
ON/STB switch. The ON/STB switch must be left in the on position to be able to
power on and power off the instrument using the principal power switch.
NOTE. If the ON/STBY switch is left in the STBY position, you will not be able to
power on/off the instrument using the PRINCIPAL POWER SWITCH or an
external power switch unit.
7-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Accessories
Accessories
Standard Accessories
The AWG710 Arbitrary Waveform Generator includes the standard accessories
listed in Table 7–2.
Table 7-2: Standard accessories
Accessory
Part number
070ĆA828Ć50
070ĆA829Ć50
062ĆA271ĆXX
062ĆA258ĆXX
062ĆA273ĆXX
062ĆA270ĆXX
015Ć1022Ć01
(see Table 7-1)
User Manual
Programmer Manual
Sample waveform floppy disk, 3.5 inch
Sample program floppy disk, 3.5 inch
Performance check/adjustment floppy disk, 3.5 inch
ArbĆLink Software (pkg of 3 floppy disks)
SMA 50 W terminator, Male (2 installed on the instrument)
Power Cord (except A99)
Optional Accessories
The optional accessories listed in Table 7–3 are recommended for use with the
instrument.
Table 7-3: Optional accessories
Accessory
Part number
070ĆA830Ć51
200Ć3696Ć01
020ĆA045Ć00
012Ć0991Ć00
012Ć1342Ć00
Service Manual
Front cover
Rack Mount Kit (for field conversion)
GPIB cable
BNC cable, 50 W, 0.6 m (2 ft)
BNC cable, 50 W, 2.5 m (8.2 ft), doubleĆshield
SMA cable, 50 W, 0.5 m, (1.64 ft), MaleĆMale
SMA cable, 50 W, 1.0 m, (3.28 ft), MaleĆMale
SMA cable, 50 W, 1.2 m, (3.94 ft), MaleĆMale
SMA cable, 50 W, 1.5 m (4.92 ft), MaleĆMale
SMA delay cable, 1 ns, MaleĆMale
012Ć1256Ć00
174Ć1427Ć00
174Ć1341Ć00
174Ć1428Ć00
012Ć1565Ć00
015Ć0562Ć00
015Ć0560Ć00
015Ć0561Ć00
015Ć1016Ć00
SMA delay cable, 2 ns, MaleĆMale
SMA delay cable, 5 ns, MaleĆMale
SMA TĆconnector, MaleĆFemale & Female
7-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Options and Accessories
Table 7-3: Optional accessories (cont.)
Accessory
Part number
015Ć1014Ć00
015Ć0562Ć00
015Ć0554Ć00
015Ć0572Ć00
020Ć1693Ć00
011Ć0049Ć02
015Ć0660Ć00
015Ć0659Ć00
015Ć0658Ć00
015Ć0657Ć00
CT1
SMA 50 W divider, Male
SMA delay cable, 1 ns, MaleĆMale
SMAĆBNC adapter, MaleĆFemale
SMAĆBNC adapter, FemaleĆMale
SMA adapter kit
BNC terminator, 50 W
BNC power divider, 50 W, DC to 300 MHz, VSWR: 1.2 max.
BNC low pass filter, 400 MHz
BNC low pass filter, 200 MHz
BNC low pass filter, 100 MHz
Transformer
Transformer
CT2
Transformer
CT6
Cart
K475
7-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Parts List
The modules that comprise this instrument are a combination of mechanical and
electrical subparts. Therefore, all replaceable modules are listed in Replaceable
Mechanical Parts. Refer to that section for part numbers when using this
manual.
8-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical Parts List
8-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagrams
This section contains the Block & Interconnect Diagram for the AWG710
Arbitrary Waveform Generator.
This diagram shows the modules and functional blocks in the waveform
generator. In addition, it illustrates how the modules in the waveform generator
are connected (see Figure 9–1).
9-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A71 OUTPUT
J310
J311
J320
J321
J700
J170
J140
AMP
FILTER
J240
10MNz REF OUT
10MH REF IN
J270
J5230
J5210
J5400
J5401
J100
J155
J180
CH1 ANALOG OUT
CH1 ANALOG OUT
J146
J144
J142
J242
J246
J244
A50
J830
J200
J810
J280
1/4 CLOCK OUT
TRIG IN
AWG BOARD
J5450
J5100
J255
A77 ATTENUATOR
A22 ON/OFF
Board
J600
EVENT Input
J5510
J5511
MARKER1 OUT
MARKER1 OUT
MARKER2 OUT
MARKER2 OUT
J1000
J610
J5610
J5611
J100
J110
J220
J630 J670
J200
J220
A40 PCI Interface Board
SLOT4
SLOT3
J220
GPIBConnector
GPIB Card
CPU Board
J200
J225
J245
LAN Connector
LAN
LCD
TFT LCD
SLOT2
SLOT1
BackLight
J220
DIMM 64MB
COM2
A20 FRONT
DIMM1
MISC
FDD
VGA
J110
J100
J154
J152
PANEL Board
DIMM 64MB
MONITOR OUT
15pin D-SUB
J150
J310
DIMM1
COM1
IDE
FAN
FLASH DISK
128MB
FAN
FAN
A10 CONNECTOR
HDD
FLOPPY DISK
DRIVE
Board
10.0 GB
J102
J1
J2
J4
PS100
J320
Power Supply
A90 KEY Board
J112
J010
J3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagrams
Cable Assembling Parts List
Tektronix part number
174-B938-00
174-B939-00
174-B643-00
174-B940-00
174-3878-00
174-B929-00
174-B930-00
174-B931-00
174-B883-00
174-4315-00
174-B882-00
174-B933-00
174-B933-00
174-B932-00
:
Connection point. A
Connection point. B
10MHz REF OUT
A50 AWG Board:J5230
A50 AWG Board:J5210
A50 AWG Board:J5450
A50 AWG Board:J5100
A50 AWG Board:J1000
A50 AWG Board:
10MHz REF IN
1/4 CLOCK OUT
TRIG IN
EVENT INPUT
PS100 Power Supply:J1
PS100 Power Supply:J2
PS100 Power Supply:J4
A40 PCI Interface Board J220
A40 PCI Interface Board J220
A22 ON/OFF Board
A50 AWG Board:
A50 AWG Board:
A50 AWG Board:J100
A50 AWG Board:J110
A50 AWG Board:J200
A50 AWG Board:J5400
A50 AWG Board:J5401
(A71 OUTPUT Board J140
A71 OUTPUT Board J240
A71 OUTPUT Board J170
A71 OUTPUT Board J270
A71 OUTPUT Board J310
A71 OUTPUT Board J311
A71 OUTPUT Board J320
A71 OUTPUT Board J321)
A71 OUTPUT Board J180
A71 OUTPUT Board J280
A50 AWG Board:J5510
A50 AWG Board:J5511
A50 AWG Board:J5610
A50 AWG Board:J5611
GPIB Card
A71 OUTPUT Board J100
A71 OUTPUT Board J200
A71 OUTPUT Board J142
A71 OUTPUT Board J242
A71 OUTPUT Board J146
A71 OUTPUT Board J144
A71 OUTPUT Board J246
A71 OUTPUT Board J244
A71 OUTPUT Board J155
A71 OUTPUT Board J255
CH1 ANALOG OUT
:
:
:
:
:
:
174-B649-00
174-B650-00
174-B934-00
174-B935-00
174-B936-00
174-B937-00
174-B884-00
174-B941-00
174-4302-00
174-B335-00
174-B334-00
174-4298-00
174-B892-00
174-B891-00
174-B887-00
174-B356-00
CH1 ANALOG OUT
MARKER1 OUT
MARKER1 OUT
MARKER2 OUT
MARKER2 OUT
GPIB Connector
GPIB Board:LAN
LAN Connector
CPU Board :LCD
A10 CONNECTOR Board J220
A10 CONNECTOR Board J110
A10 CONNECTOR Board J100
A10 CONNECTOR Board J150
FAN
CPU Board :MICS
CPU Board :FDD
CPU Board:VGA,COM1
A10 CONNECTOR Board J310
CPU Board :IDE
FLASH DISK,HDD
A10 CONNECTOR Board J320
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J010
PCI Backplane
PS100 Power supply J3
9-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Diagrams
Cable Assembling Parts List (Cont.)
Tektronix part number
174-B338-00
Connection point. A
Connection point. B
A90 Key Board
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J112
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J102
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J225
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J152
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J154
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J245
A10 CONNECTOR Board:J200
174-B329-01
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE
TFT LCD
174-B926-00
174-3879-00
MONITOR OUT(15pin,D-Sub)
A20 FRONT PANEL Board
Back Light
174-B337-00
174-B889-00
174-B886-00
A40 PCI Interface Board J200
9-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
This section contains a list of the replaceable modules for the AWG710 Arbitrary
Waveform Generator. Use this list to identify and order replacement parts.
Parts Ordering Information
Replacement parts are available through your local Tektronix field office or
representative.
Changes to Tektronix instruments are sometimes made to accommodate
improved components as they become available and to give you the benefit of
the latest circuit improvements. Therefore, when ordering parts, it is important to
include the following information in your order.
H
H
H
H
Part number
Instrument type or model number
Instrument serial number
Instrument modification number, if applicable
If you order a part that has been replaced with a different or improved part, your
local Tektronix field office or representative will contact you concerning any
change in part number.
Part Number Revision
Level
Tektronix part numbers contain two digits that show the revision level of the
part. For most parts in this manual, you will find the letters XX in place of the
revision level number.
Part Number Revision Level
Revision Level may show as XX
670Ć7918Ć03
670Ć7918ĆXX
When you order parts, Tektronix will provide you with the most current part for
your product type, serial number, and modification (if applicable). At the time of
your order, Tektronix will determine the part number revision level needed for
your product, based on the information you provide.
10-1
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Module Servicing
Modules can be serviced by selecting one of the following three options. Contact
your local Tektronix service center or representative for repair assistance.
Module Exchange. In some cases you may exchange your module for a reman-
ufactured module. These modules cost significantly less than new modules and
meet the same factory specifications. For more information about the module
exchange program, call 1-800-TEK-WIDE, extension 6630.
Module Repair and Return. You may ship your module to us for repair, after which
we will return it to you.
New Modules. You may purchase replacement modules in the same way as other
replacement parts.
Using the Replaceable Parts List
This section contains a list of the mechanical and/or electrical components that
are replaceable for the generator. Use this list to identify and order replacement
parts. The following table describes each column in the parts list.
Parts List Column Descriptions
Column Column name
Description
1
Figure & Index Number
Tektronix Part Number
Serial Number
Items in this section are referenced by component number.
Use this part number when ordering replacement parts from Tektronix.
2
3 and 4
Column three indicates the serial number at which the part was first effective. Column four
indicates the serial number at which the part was discontinued. No entries indicates the part is
good for all serial numbers.
5
6
Qty
This indicates the quantity of parts used.
Name & Description
An item name is separated from the description by a colon (:). Because of space limitations, an
item name may sometimes appear as incomplete. Use the U.S. Federal Catalog handbook
H6Ć1 for further item name identification.
7
8
Mfr. Code
This indicates the code of the actual manufacturer of the part. (Code to name and address cross
reference is located after this page.)
Mfr. Part Number
This indicates the actual manufacturer's or vendor's part number.
Abbreviations
Abbreviations conform to American National Standard ANSI Y1.1–1972.
Mfr. Code to Manufacturer
Cross Index
The following table cross indexes codes, names, and addresses of manufacturers
or vendors of components listed in the parts list.
10-2
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Manufacturers Cross Index
Mfr.
Code
Manufacturer
Address
City, state, zip code
S3109
FELLER
72 VERONICA AVE
UNIT 4
SUMMERSET NJ 08873
TK0392
TK0435
TK1163
TK1287
NORTHWEST FASTENER SALES INC
LEWIS SCREW CO
8058 SW NIMBUS AVENUE
4300 S RACINE AVE
BEAVERTON OR 97008
CHICAGO IL 60609-3320
TIGARD OR 97223
POLYCAST INC
9898 SW TIGARD ST
ENOCH MFG CO
14242 SE 82ND DR
PO BOX 98
CLACKAMAS OR 97015
TK1908
TK1918
TK2058
TK2432
TK2548
PLASTIC MOLDED PRODUCTS
SHIN-ETSU POLYMER AMERICA INC
TDK CORPORATION OF AMERICA
UNION ELECTRIC
4336 SO ADAMS
TACOMA WA 98409
1181 NORTH 4TH ST
SAN JOSE CA 95112
1600 FEEHANVILLE DRIVE
15/F #1, FU-SHING N. ROAD
14181 SW MILLIKAN WAY
MOUNT PROSPECT, IL 60056
TAIPEI, TAIWAN ROC
BEAVERTON OR 97077
XEROX BUSINESS SERVICES
DIV OF XEROX CORPORATION
0JR05
0KB01
00779
TRIQUEST CORP3000 LEWIS AND CLARK HWY
VANCOUVER WA 98661-2999
STAUFFER SUPPLY
AMPINC
810 SE SHERMAN
PORTLAND OR 97214
HARRISBURG PA 17105
2800 FULLING MILL
PO BOX 3608
07416
NELSON NAME PLATE CO
BELDEN CORPORATION
3191 CASITAS
LOS ANGELES CA 90039-2410
RICHMOND IN 47375-0010
2W733
2200 US HIGHWAY 27 SOUTH
PO BOX 1980
24931
6D224
61058
SPECIALTY CONNECTOR CO INC
2100 EARLYWOOD DR
PO BOX 547
FRANKLIN IN 46131
GARDENA, CA 90248
SECAUCUS NJ 07094
HARBOR TRI-TEC
A BERG ELECTRONICS COMPANY
14500 SOUTH BROADWAY
MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPOF AMERICA
PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL CO DIV
TWO PANASONIC WAY
61857
61935
64537
73743
75915
SAN-0 INDUSTRIAL CORP91-3 COLIN DRIVE
SCHURTER INC
HOLBROOK NY 11741
1016 CLEGG COURT
60 S JEFFERSON ROAD
111 INDUSTRIAL RD
PETALUMA CA 94952-1152
WHIPPANY, NJ 07981
KDI/TRIANGLE ELECTRONICS
FISCHER SPECIAL MFG CO
COLD SPRING KY 41076-9749
DES PLAINES IL 60016-3049
LITTELFUSE TRACOR INC
SUB OF TRACOR INC
800 E NORTHWEST HWY
78189
80009
ILLINOIS TOOL WORKS INC
SHAKEPROOF DIV
ST CHARLES ROAD
ELGIN IL 60120
TEKTRONIX INC
14150 SW KARL BRAUN DR
PO BOX 500
BEAVERTON OR 97077-0001
86928
98291
SEASTROM MFG CO INC
701 SONORA AVE
40 LINDEMAN DR
GLENDALE CA 91201-2431
TURNBULL CT 06611-4739
SEALECTRO CORP
BICC ELECTRONICS
10-3
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
334-A580-01
101-0142-00
260-2715-00
259-A001-00
426-A188-00
number
1-1
334-A580-01
101-0142-01
260-2715-00
259-A001-00
348-1276-00
1
1
1
1
MARKER, IDENT:MKD AWG710, POLYCARBONATE
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT,RACK MOUNT
ACTUATOR:ELASTOMER MAT,FRONT PANEL,RUBBER
FLEX CIRCUIT BEZEL BUTTONS
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
11C GASKET,SHIELD: CONDUCTIVE FORM STRIP,3.3MM X
M
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4.8MM,W/ADHESIVE TAPE,1M L
ĂĂĂ-6
426-A188-00
378-0466-00
343-A344-00
426-A189-00
119-B086-00
344-0472-00
407-A645-00
119-B087-00
211-1036-00
FRAME, DISPLAY:MAIN FILTER, AL
FILTER,LT,CRT SMOKE GRAY,ACRILIC,WITH AR FILM
RETAINER, FILTER, SST
426-A188-00
378-0466-00
343-A344-00
426-A189-00
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
ĂĂĂ-9
FRAME, LCD:PC, BLACK
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
ĂĂĂ-14
DISPLAY MONITOR: 6.4 INCH, COLOR-TFT, 640X480, VGA
BUSHING:BUSHING,NYLON,GRAY
BRACKET, LCD:AL
SHARP LQ64D343
344-0472-00
407-A645-00
INVERTER UNIT: IN 9.6-14.4V, FOR DUAL BULB
TDK
CXA-0214
SCREW,MACHINE M2 X 6MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,CROSS
REC,W/FALT&LOCK WASHERS
211-1036-00
ĂĂĂ-15
ĂĂĂ-16
174-B926-00
174-B889-00
1
1
CA, ASSY, SPELEC 31, 28AWG, 15CM L, FD9M-31S-1R
BOTH ENDS
174-B926-00
174-B889-00
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:6, 26AWG, 15CM L, W/HOLDER, 1MM
CTR
ĂĂĂ-17
ĂĂĂ-18
343-0778-00
211-1036-00
1
4
CLAMP,LOOP:5.4MM ID,66NYLON
343-0778-00
211-1036-00
SCREW,MACHINE M2 X 6MM L,PNH,STL,MFZN-C,CROSS
REC,W/FALT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-19
211-0751-00
4
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
211-0751-00
10-4
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
15
14
13
11
12
10
9
8
6
7
16
5
17
2
4
3
18
1
19
Figure 10-1: Front and Display unit
10-5
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
333-A414-00
386-A838-00
380-0927-01
260-2715-00
348-1159-00
671-B081-01
211-0751-00
number
2-1
333-A414-00
386-A838-00
380-0927-01
260-2715-00
348-1159-00
671-B081-01
211-0751-00
1
1
1
1
2
1
6
PANEL, FRONT: KEYBOARD, AWG710, POLYCARBONATE
SUBPANEL, FRONT:KEYBOARD, AL, AWG710
HOLDER,SWITCH
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ACTUATOR:ELASTOMER MAT,FRONT PANEL,RUBBER
SHIELD,ELEC:SST,W/CHEVRONS,0.4 PITCH,8.0L
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A20,FRONT PANEL,389-A689-00 WIRED
SCREW,MACHINE: M3X8MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-8
377-0579-00
348-1160-00
124-0469-00
210-A084-00
366-2170-00
366-2114-00
366-2111-00
5
1
1
1
1
2
3
INSERT,KNOB:PLASTIC
337-0579-00
348-1160-00
124-0469-00
210-A084-00
366-2170-00
366-2114-00
366-2111-00
ĂĂĂ-9
SHIELD,ELEC:SST,W/CHEVRONS,0.4 PITCH,5.0L
STRIP,TRIM:FRONT PANEL,AL
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
ĂĂĂ-14
WASHER,PLAIN:M3,NYLON,3.1 X 6.0 X 0.5
KNOB:1.700DIA
KNOB:IVORY GRAY,SCROLL,1.243 IDX 1.4 OD X 0.4 H
KNOB:IVORY GRAY,SCROLL,1.243 IDX 1.4 OD X 0.4 H
10-6
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
8
14
13
9
11
10
12
Figure 10-2: Front panel
10-7
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List (except option02)
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
number
3-1
174-B649-00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,15CM L,9-1,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
174-B649-00
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
174-B650-00
174-B643-00
174-B644-00
174-B645-00
174-B646-00
671-B152-00
211-0871-00
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,15CM L,9-2,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
174-B650-00
174-B643-00
174-B644-00
174-B645-00
174-B646-00
671-B152-00
211-0871-00
366-A054-00
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,50CM L,9-1,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,50CM L,9-2,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,50CM L,9-3,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
CA ASSY,RF:50 OHM COAX,50CM L,9-4,SMA TO PELTORA,
SST SHELL
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY: A22 KEY ON/OFF,389-B153-00,
WIRED
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X6MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
W/FLAT(7MM OD)&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-9
366-A054-00
343-0549-00
211-0751-00
2
2
5
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN, ABS
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
STRAP,TIEDOWN:1.6-19MM DIA,66NYLON
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
211-0751-00
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
333-A463-00
407-A655-00
1
1
PANEL,FRONT:KEYBOARD,MTX100,POLYCARBONATE,T0.2
BRACKET, ASSY:OUTPUT CONNECTOR, AL
333-A463-00
407-A656-00
10-8
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
1
7
2
3
8
4
9
5
6
11
13
1
6
∼
12
1
2
10
3
11
4
5
6
Figure 10-3: Front Output unit (except option 02)
10-9
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List (for option 02)
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
174-B934-00
174-B935-00
174-B936-00
174-B937-00
174-C046-00
174-C046-00
671-B152-00
number
4-1
174-B934-00
174-B935-00
174-B936-00
174-B937-00
174-C046-00
174-C047-00
671-B152-00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
W5510, 45CM L, MKD 1, SMA TO PELTRA
W5511, 45CM L, MKD 2, SMA TO PELTRA
W5610, 45CM L, MKD 3, SMA TO PELTRA
W5611, 45CM L, MKD 4, SMA TO PELTRA
W701, 15CM L.,MKD 1, SMA-SMA, (CH1 TO K100)
W702, 15CM L, MKD 2, SMA-SMA, (CH1 TO K200)
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
CIRCUIT BOARD ASSY: A22 KEY ON/OFF, 389-B153-00,
WIRED
ĂĂĂ-8
211-0871-00
3
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L, PNH, STL,ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT (7MM OD)&LOCK WASHERS
211-0871-00
ĂĂĂ-9
366-0753-00
343-0549-00
211-0751-00
2
2
5
PUSH BUTTON:TEK TAN, ABS
366-0753-00
343-0549-00
211-0751-00
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
STRAP, TIEDOWN:1.6-19MM DIA, 66NYLON
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L, PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS
REC W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
ĂĂĂ
333-A463-00
407-A655-00
614-A027-00
1
1
1
PANEL, FRONT:SMA, AWG710 option 02, POLYCARBONATE,
BRACKET, ASSY:OUTPUT CONNECTOR, AL
333-A463-00
407-A656-00
614-A027-00
PANEL, ASSY KIT THIS KIT CONTAINS ALL ABOVE PARTS.
10-10
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
5
7
6
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
11
13
9
1
∼
4
12
5
6
10
1
11
2
3
4
Figure 10-4: Front Output unit (for option 02)
10-11
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
index
number
effective
discont'd
code
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
441-A282-00
211-0945-00
number
5-1
441-A282-00
211-0945-00
211-0871-00
1
CHASSIS, ASSY:CPU, AL, See Fig 10-5
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
SCREW, MACHINE:M4X8MM L,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
5
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X6MM L,PNH,STL,ZN PL,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT(7MM OD)& LOCKWASHER
211-0871-00
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
671-B130-00
407-A648-00
211-0871-00
1
1
7
CIRCUIT BD ASSY: A10 CONNECTOR, 389-B099-XX WIRED
BRACKET:HDD, CONNECTOR BD, AL, AWG710
671-B130-00
407-A648-00
211-0871-00
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X6MM L,PNH,STL,ZN PL,CROSS REC,
W/FLAT(7MM OD)& LOCKWASHER
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
ĂĂĂ-9
119-B090-00
119-B138-00
131-A609-00
620-A006-00
1
1
1
1
HDD UNIT:"2.5", "10.06HB, IDE I/F", FORMATTED
MEMORY MODULE:"2.5",FLASH DISK,256MB
BUS,CONDUCTOR:SHORT BAR,2MM PITCH
IBM
119-B090-00
119-B138-00
131-A609-00
FH0410
POWER SUPPLY:IN 90-250V, 47-63HZ, OUT +5V/20A,
-2V/10A, -5V/18A, +12V/4.7A, 3.3V/20A, +15OR8V/3A, -
FUJI
DENKI
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
174-B931-00
174-B930-00
174-B929-00
119-B149-00
1
1
1
1
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:12, 22AWG, 6CM L
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:18, 22AWG, 6CM L
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:14, 22AWG, 6CM L
174-B881-00
174-B880-00
174-B879-00
119-B149-00
MEMORY MODULE:SOLID STATE DRIVE, 16MB, IDE-I/F F/W
INSTALLED
ĂĂĂ-14
ĂĂĂ-15
ĂĂĂ-16
ĂĂĂ-17
ĂĂĂ-18
ĂĂĂ-19
ĂĂĂ-20
ĂĂĂ-21
ĂĂĂ-22
ĂĂĂ-23
ĂĂĂ-24
ĂĂĂ-25
174-B891-00
344-0472-00
174-B356-00
344-A019-00
343-1644-00
343-0549-00
211-A044-00
650-A878-00
220-A177-00
344-0472-00
255-0732-00
211-1082-00
1
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:44, 28AWG, FLAT, 23CM L, 2MM CTR
BUSHING:BUSHING,NYLON,GRAY
174-B891-00
344-0472-00
174-B356-00
WS-2WS
3
1
CABLE, ASSY, SP:PS, 16CON, A10, 7CM, 5557-16R
CLIP, CABLE:WIRE SADDLE, 16 MM X 15.5 MM, 66 NYLON
CLIP, CABLE:WIRE SADDLE,
2
2
UAMS-07-0
343-0549-00
211-A044-00
650-A878-00
220-A177-00
344-0472-00
255-0732-00
211-1082-00
8
STRAP,TIEDOWN:1.6-19MM DIA,66NYLON
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X10MML,FLH,STLZNPL,CROSSREC
CHASSIS,ASSY:AL,FRONT&REARPNL,BUILDONMAIN
NUT, PLATE:STL, ZN PL
2
1
1
5
BUSHING:BUSHING,NYLON,GRAY
CM
1
PLASTICCHANNEL:1.7MMX3.7MMX4.0MM,NATURAL,NYLON
SCREW,MACHINE: M2.6X10MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT & LOCKWASHER
ĂĂĂ-26
ĂĂĂ-27
ĂĂĂ-28
ĂĂĂ-29
211-1033-00
105-1081-03
119-5953-00
211-A218-00
1
1
1
1
SCREW,MACHINE:M2.6X3MM L,PNH,BRS NI PL CROSS REC
211-1033-00
105-1081-03
119-5953-00
211-A218-00
BRACKET,FDD ADAPTOR
FD DRIVE
SCREW,MACHINE:M2.6X6MML,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSSREC
W/LOCK&FLAT
ĂĂĂ-30
ĂĂĂ-31
ĂĂĂ-32
174-B329-01
344-0472-00
119-B103-00
1
3
2
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:26 COND,150MM,FFC
BUSHING,NYLON,GRAY
174-B329-01
344-0472-00
FAN, TUBEAXIAL:12V, 225MA, 2.7W, 2950RPM, 56.8CFM,
42.1PA, FBA09A12HZ, W/O LEAD
MATSU FBA09A12HZ
SHITA
10-12
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List (Cont.)
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
index
number
effective
discont'd
code
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
number
ĂĂĂ-33
129-A229-00
4
SPACER,POST:20.OMML,M4INT/EXTTHD,7MMHEX,STL
ZN-CPL
UN237-P4
ĂĂĂ-34
ĂĂĂ-35
ĂĂĂ-36
210-0008-00
174-B892-00
212-A049-00
1
1
8
WASHER,LOCK:#8 INTL,0.02 THK,STL CD PL
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:6, 26AWG, 26CM L, FOR FAN MOTOR
210-0008-00
174-B892-00
212-A049-00
SCREW, MACHINE:M4X30MM L, BDGH, STL ZN-C PL,
CROSS REC
ĂĂĂ-37
ĂĂĂ-38
211-1042-00
119-B104-00
4
1
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X10MM L,BDGH,STL,ZN PL
211-1042-00
FAN, TUBEAXIAL: 12V, 370MA, 4.44W, 2500RPM, 103.8CFM,
66.7PA, FBL12G12H, W/O LEAD
MATSU FBL12G12H
SHITA
39 40
4
2
3
1
6
35
36
37
38
5
2
7
2
8
29
24
33
2
34
13
32
31
9
19
14
2
30
28
15
16
27
26
2
2
2
12
10
11
17
25
23
24
18
23
19
21
20
22
Figure 10-5: Chassis
10-13
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
441-A282-00
number
6-1
441-A282-00
343-A345-00
211-0871-00
1
CHASSIS, ASSY:CPU, AL, AWG710
RETAINER,CKT BD:CPU,AL,AWG710
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
1
343-A345-00
10
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X6MM L,PNH,STL,ZN PL,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT(7MM OD)& LOCK WASHER
211-0871-00
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
119-6139-00
119-B136-00
1
1
COMPUTER KIT:BACK PLANE BD,3SLOT,PCI BUS
119-6139-00
CPU, UNIT:PENTIUM 133MHZ, W/64MB DIMM, 100BT,
HALF-SIZE WITH DIMM AND SET UP
HPU5810ADA-133
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
ĂĂĂ-9
671-B129-00
119-A849-00
407-A647-00
174-B334-00
174-B335-00
174-4298-00
174-B886-00
174-4302-00
174-B883-00
174-4315-00
174-B887-00
343-1644-00
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A40 PCI I/F, 389-B102-XX WIRED
INTERFACE BOARD: PCI-GPIB CARD
671-B129-00
777440-01
BRACKET, BOARD:PCI I/F, AL, AWG710
407-A647-00
174-B334-00
174-B336-00
174-4298-00
174-B886-00
174-4302-00
174-B883-00
174-4315-00
174-B887-00
343-1644-00
CA ASSY, SP, ELEC:34, 28AWG, 9CM L, FLAT
CA ASSY, SP, ELEC:16, 28AWG, 11CM L, FLAT, DISPLAY
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:20CON/9CON/15CON,AWG26,23CM L
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:26, 28AWG, FLAT, 25CM L
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50,AWG28,20CM L,FLAT, 1MM
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:80, 30AWG, FLAT, 27CM L, 0.65CTR
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC: 100,AWG32,30CM L,FLAT
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:3, 18AWG, 30CM L
ĂĂĂ-10
CLAMP,CABLE:CLIP LOCKING WIRE,NYLON
10-14
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
1
3
2
5
3
10
4
5
3
6
3
8
7
9
3
Figure 10-6: CPU unit
10-15
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List (except option02)
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
337-A211-00
number
7-1
337-A211-00
211-0751-00
1
2
SHIELD, ELEC:ATT, TOP
ĂĂĂ-2
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
211-0751-00
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
ĂĂĂ-9
200-A522-00
174-B932-00
174-B933-00
344-0557-00
338-A855-00
351-A165-00
129-A558-00
1
8
2
3
1
1
2
COVER, CABLE, AL
200-A522-00
174-B932-00
174-B933-00
344-0557-00
338-A855-00
351-A165-00
129-A558-00
CA, ASSY, RF:50OHM COAX, 15CM L, PELTRA
CA, ASSY, RF:500HM COAX, 21CM L, PELTRA
CLIP, CABLE:WIRE SADDLE, 11.1 MM X 14.7 MM, 66-NYLON
STIFFENER:OUTPUT BOARD
GUIDE, CKT BOARD, NYLON
SPACER, POST:9.0MM L, M3, INT/EXT THD, 5.5 MM HEX,
BRS NI PL
ĂĂĂ-10
211-0751-00
2
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
211-0751-00
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-13
671-B147-01
671-B207-00
671-B208-00
211-0751-00
1
1
1
8
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A71 OUTPUT, 389-B150-01 WIRED
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A50, STD, 389-B115-02 WIRED
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A50, OP-01, 32M, 389-B115-02 WIRED
671-B147-01
671-B207-00
671-B208-00
211-0751-00
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-14
ĂĂĂ-15
ĂĂĂ-16
ĂĂĂ-17
ĂĂĂ-18
337-A212-00
220-0212-00
210-A015-00
210-A007-00
129-A061-00
1
1
1
1
4
SHIELD, ELEC:OUTPUT BOARD
337-A212-00
220-0212-00
210-A015-00
210-A007-00
SQ-24
NUT, PLAIN, HEX:M3 X 5.5 MM HEX, STL, ZN-C, 1-SHU
WASHER, LOCK:#3, SPLIT, STL MFZN-C
WASHER, PLAIN:#3, 6 MM OD, STL MFZN-C
SPACER, POST:10.0MM L, M3, INT/EXT THD, 5.5 MM HEX,
BRS NI PL
ĂĂĂ-19
129-A592-00
5
SPACER, POST:7.0MM L, M3 INT/EXT THD, BRS, 5.5MM
HEX, BRS NIPL
SQ-15
ĂĂĂ-20
ĂĂĂ-21
348-1371-00
211-0751-00
4
5
FOOT, CABINET:CLEAR POLYURETHANE W/ADHESIVE
348-1371-00
211-0751-00
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-22
ĂĂĂ-23
337-A210-00
211-0751-00
1
4
SHIELD, ELEC, ATT:BOTTOM
337-A210-00
211-0751-00
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
ĂĂĂ-24
ĂĂĂ-25
ĂĂĂ-26
ĂĂĂ-27
671-B148-01
386-A848-01
348-1203-00
211-0751-00
1
1
2
5
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A77 ATT, 389-B113-01 WIRED
STIFFNER, CKT BD:ATT
671-B148-01
386-A848-01
348-1203-00
211-0751-00
FOOT, CABINET:CLEAR POLYURETHANE W/ADHESIVE
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X8MM L,PNH, STL, ZN-C, CROSS REC
W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
10-16
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
–
1
27
2
26
25
24
23
3
4
5
22
21
6
20
7
8
19
18
9
12
17
16
15
10
11
14
13
Figure 10-7: Circuit boards(except option 02)
10-17
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List (for option02)
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
number
8-1
129-A061-00
6
6
SPACER, POST:10.0MM L, M3, INT/EXT THD, 5.5 MM HEX,
BRS NI PL
129-A061-00
ĂĂĂ-2
211-0751-00
SCREW, MACHINE: M3X 8MM L, PNH, STL, N-C, CROSS
REC W/FLAT&LOCK WASHERS
211-0751-00
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
148-A079-00
174-C052-00
211-A240-00
174-C049-00
174-C048-00
343-A360-00
2
2
4
1
1
1
RELAY (K100, K200)
148-A079-00
174-C052-00
211-A240-00
174-C049-00
174-C048-00
343-A360-00
W710, W720, 10CM4CON, RIBON
SCREW MACHINE: M3X20MM L, PNH, STL ZN PL, CROSS
W5401, 25CM L MKD 2, SMA-PELTRA (K200 - A50:J5401)
W5400, 25CM L MKD 1, SMA-PELTRA (K100 - A50:J5400)
CLAMP, CABLE: LOCKING WIRE SADDLE 11MM X 7.2MM,
66NYLON
ĂĂĂ-9
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ
174-C051-00
174-C050-00
671-B271-50
220-A184-00
650-A910-00
1
1
1
2
1
W520, 10CM L, MKD 2, SMA-PELTRA (K200 - A72:J520)
W510, 10CM L, MKD 1, SMA-PELTRA (K100 - A72:J510)
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A72 OUTPUT
174-C051-00
351-A165-00
671-B271-50
220-A184-00
650-A910-00
NUT, PLAT: AL
MODULER KIT, THIS KIT CONTAINS PARTS No. 3 THROUGH
No. 12.
10-18
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
–
8
10
9
6
5
7
4
3
2
4
1
3
11
12
Figure 10-8: Circuit boards (for option 02)
10-19
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
number effective discont'd
Mfr.
index
number
code
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
index
number
effective
discont'd
code
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
333-A435-00
174-3878-00
276-0324-00
131-1315-01
number
9-1
333-A435-00
174-3878-00
276-0324-00
131-1315-01
1
1
3
3
PANEL, REAR:AWG710, AL
ĂĂĂ-2
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:10CON/9PIN, 26AWG, 27CM L
CORE [ ZCAT1518-0730]
CONN,RF,JACK:BNC,50OHM,FEMALE,STR,PELTORA,PANEL
MOUNT
ĂĂĂ-5
174-B643-00
1
CA ASSY,SP,ELEC:50OHM COAX,50CM L,9-1,SMA-PELĆ
TRA,SST SHELL
174-B643-00
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
ĂĂĂ-9
174-B941-00
174-B942-00
407-4554-00
211-0871-00
1
2
1
1
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:8, LAN, 100BASE-T, 35CM L, TWISTED
CA, ASSY, SP ELEC:1, 22AWG, 4.5CM L, 0-N, W/LUG M3
BRACKET, CONN:MODULAR CONN
174-B885-00
174-B942-00
SCREW,MACHINE:M3X6MM L,PNH,STL,ZN PL,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT(7MM OD)& LOCKWASHER
211-0871-00
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
671-4326-00
174-B338-00
1
1
CIRCUIT BD ASSY:A90 KEYBOARD; 389-A695-00 WIRED
671-4326-00
174-B338-00
CA ASSY, SP, ELEC:6, 26AWG, 43CM L, RIBBON,
W/HOLDER, 2MM PITCH
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-12
ĂĂĂ-12
174-B940-00
174-B939-00
174-B938-00
174-B643-00
1
1
1
1
CA, ASSY, RF:50OHM COAX, 50CM L, MKD T1, PELTRA
CA, ASSY, RF:50OHM COAX, 55CM L, MKD R0, PELTRA
CA, ASSY, RF:50OHM COAX, 55CM L, MKD R1, PELTRA
174-B940-00
174-B939-00
174-B938-00
174-B643-00
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC:50OHM COAX, 55CM L, 9-1,
SMA-PELTRA, SST SHELL
ĂĂĂ-13
ĂĂĂ-14
ĂĂĂ-15
ĂĂĂ-16
220-A176-00
174-B884-00
211-0945-00
174-3879-00
1
NUT, PLATE:STL
220-A176-00
174-B884-00
CA, ASSY, SP, ELEC: 24, 28AWG, FLAT, 40CM, GPIB
SCREW, MACHINE:M4X8MM L,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
7
1
CA ASSY, SP, ELEC:8, 26AWG, 43CM L, RIBBON W/
HOLDER, 2MM PITCH
174-3879-00
214-3903-01
ĂĂĂ-17
214-3903-01
4
SCREW,JACK:4-40 X 0.312 EXT THD,4-40 INT THD,0.188
HEX,STEEL,CAD PLATE
ĂĂĂ-18
ĂĂĂ-19
210-A015-00
210-A007-00
159Ć0407ĆXX
4
4
1
WASHER, LOCK:#3, SPLIT, STL MFZN-C
210-A015-00
210-A007-00
159Ć0407ĆXX
WASHER, PLAIN:#3, 6MM OD, STL MFZn-C, KOGATAMARU
FUSE, CARTRIDGE, 3AG, 10A, 350VAC, FAST, 6.35MM X
31.75 MM (0.25 IN X 1.25 IN)
159Ć0210ĆXX
1
FUSE, CARTRIDGE, DIN 5 X 20MM, 5A, 250V SLOW BLOW,
5MM X 20MM (.197 IN X .788 IN)
159Ć0210ĆXX
200Ć2264ĆXX
200Ć2265ĆXX
1
1
CAP, FUSEHOLDER, 3AG FUSES
200Ć2264ĆXX
200Ć2265ĆXX
CAP, FUSEHOLDER, 5 X 20MM FUSES
10-20
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
7
3
9
2
1
10
8
7
4
6
19
18
3
17
5
11
4
13
14
16
12
5
15
Figure 10-9: Rear Panel
10-21
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
390-A088-00
number
10-1
ĂĂĂ-2
390-A088-00
348-1314-00
1
CABINET ASSY:AL
122
CM
GASKET,SHIELD:FINGER TYPE,BE-CU,609.6MM
L,W/ADHESIVE
348-1314-00
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
211-0945-00
212-0210-00
2
6
SCREW, MACHINE:M4X8MM L,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
211-0945-00
212-0210-00
SCREW, MACHINE:M5X20MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
JIS B111
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
348-1115-00
437-A011-00
2
1
FOOT,CABINET:SLATE GRAY,PLASTIC
348-1115-00
437-A011-00
CABINET ASSY:FOOT STAND & CARRING HANDLE, BUILT
ON CABINET(390-A088-XX)
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
101-0142-00
348-1569-00
1
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT
101-0142-00
348-1569-00
114
CM
SHILD GASKET, ELEC:MESH TYPE, 3.2MM OD, SI SPONG
CORE
10-22
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
3
2
4
1
5
8
6
6
6
6
7
Figure 10-10: Cabinet
10-23
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
Replaceable Parts List
Fig. &
Tektronix part Serial no. Serial no.
Mfr.
code
index
number
effective
discont'd
Qty Name & description
Mfr. part number
101-0142-01
number
11-1
ĂĂĂ-2
101-0142-01
348-1569-00
1
TRIM,DECORATIVE:FRONT,RACK MOUNT
114
CM
SHILD GASKET, ELEC:MESH TYPE, 3.2MM OD, SI SPONG
CORE
348-1569-00
ĂĂĂ-3
ĂĂĂ-4
367-0022-00
212-0507-00
2
4
HANDLE,BOW:4.579 L,BRS CRPL
367-0022-00
212-0507-00
SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL
ZN-CM1,POZIDRIV
ĂĂĂ-5
ĂĂĂ-6
ĂĂĂ-7
ĂĂĂ-8
390-A088-00
407-A651-01
211-0945-00
348-1314-00
1
2
2
CABINET ASSY:AL, AWG710
390-A088-00
407-A651-00
211-0945-00
348-1314-00
BRACKET: SUPPORT, SIDE, RACK MOUNT, AL
SCREW, MACHINE:M4X8MM L,STL,ZN-C,CROSS REC
122
CM
GASKET,SHIELD:FINGER TYPE,BE-CU,609.6MM
L,W/ADHESIVE
ĂĂĂ-9
212-0214-00
6
SCREW,MACHINE:M5X12MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-C,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT & LOCK WASHER
212-0214-00
ĂĂĂ-10
ĂĂĂ-11
ĂĂĂ-12
351-0313-00
351-0623-00
212-0507-00
1
1
4
GUIDE,RACKMOUNT:19.218 L,PAIR
351-0313-00
351-0623-00
212-0507-00
SLIDE,DWR,EXT:22.0 X 1.54,STEELSAFFTY CONTROLLED
SCREW,MACHINE:10-32 X 0.375,PNH,STL
ZN-CM1,POZIDRIV
ĂĂĂ-13
ĂĂĂ-14
212-0215-00
407-4020-00
4
2
SCREW,MACHINE:M4X12MM L,PNH,STL,ZN-PL,CROSS
REC,W/FLAT & LOCK WASHER
212-0215-00
407-4020-00
BRACKET,SUPPORT:FRONT,ALUMINUM
10-24
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replaceable Mechanical Parts
8
7
9
6
12
5
4
10
11
13
3
2
14
1
12
Figure 10-11: Rack mount
10-25
AWG710 Service Manual
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|